00 01 10 table of contents - amazon s3 · 6/29/2012 · colorado state university 00 01 10 - 1...

Colorado State University 00 01 10 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Durrell Center Revitalization 29 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE DATE ISSUE

VOLUME 1

DIVISION 00 – INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTI NG REQUIREMENTS 00 01 10 Table of Contents 06/29/2012 2 00 01 15 List of Drawings 06/29/2012 2 00 41 00 Bid Forms 06/20/2012 1 00 50 00 Contracting Forms 06/20/2012 1 00 70 00 General Conditions 06/20/2012 1 00 91 00 Contract Document Forms 06/20/2012 1 00 93 00 Project Forms 06/20/2012 1 00 93 00.01 Addendum 1 06/29/2012 2 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 Summary of Work 06/29/2012 2 01 23 00 Alternates 06/20/2012 1 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 06/20/2012 1 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 06/20/2012 1 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 06/20/2012 1 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 06/20/2012 1 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 06/20/2012 1 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 06/20/2012 1 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 06/20/2012 1 01 43 00 Quality Assurance 06/20/2012 1 01 45 00 Quality Control 06/20/2012 1 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 06/20/2012 1 01 60 00 Product Requirements 06/20/2012 1 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 06/20/2012 1 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 06/20/2012 1 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 32 00 Geotechnical Investigations 06/20/2012 1 02 41 00 Demolition 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 06/20/2012 1 03 33 00 Integral Colored Concrete 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 27 31 Reinforced Unit Masonry 06/20/2012 1


04 42 00 Exterior Stone Cladding 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 12 00 05 31 23

Structural Steel Steel Roof Deck

06/20/2012 1

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 06/20/2012 1 05 51 00 Metal Stairs 06/20/2012 1 05 73 00 Decorative Metal Railings 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06/20/2012 1 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 16 16 Crystalline Waterproofing 06/20/2012 1 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 06/20/2012 1 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 06/20/2012 1 07 42 64 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 06/20/2012 1 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 06/20/2012 1 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 06/20/2012 1 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 06/20/2012 1 07 90 05 Joint Sealers 06/20/2012 1 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 06/20/2012 1 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 06/20/2012 1 08 38 15 Double-Acting Traffic Doors 06/20/2012 1 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 06/20/2012 1 08 71 00 Door Hardware 06/20/2012 1 08 80 00 Glazing 06/20/2012 1 08 83 00 Mirrors 06/20/2012 1 08 91 00 Louvers 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 06/20/2012 1 09 30 00 Tiling 06/20/2012 1 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 06/20/2012 1 09 51 33 Gridless Metal Ceiling 06/20/2012 1 09 54 16 Luminous Ceilings 06/20/2012 1 09 54 23 Linear Wood Ceilings 06/20/2012 1 09 62 18 Vinyl Plank Flooring 06/20/2012 1 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 06/20/2012 1 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 06/20/2012 1 09 72 00 Wall Coverings 06/20/2012 1 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 06/20/2012 1 09 98 50 Sheet FRP Wall Panels 06/20/2012 1


DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 11 01 Visual Display Boards 06/20/2012 1 10 22 26.33 Folding Panel Partitions 06/20/2012 1 10 26 01 Wall and Corner Guards 06/20/2012 1 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 06/20/2012 1 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 Foodservice Specifications 06/29/2012 2 11 52 00 Audio and Video Systems 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 24 00 Window Shades 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 13 –NOT USED DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 20 10 Passenger Elevators 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 15 – 20 (RESERVED) – NOT USED

VOLUME 2

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 06/20/2012 1 21 11 00 Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping 06/20/2012 1 21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 06/20/2012 1 22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 06/20/2012 1 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 06/20/2012 1 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 06/20/2012 1 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 06/20/2012 1 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 06/20/2012 1 22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 06/20/2012 1 22 13 23 Sanitary Waste Interceptors 06/20/2012 1 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR -CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 06/20/2012 1 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 06/29/2012 2 23 05 19 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 06/20/2012 1 23 05 23 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 06/20/2012 1 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 06/20/2012 1


23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 06/20/2012 1 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 06/20/2012 1 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 06/20/2012 1 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 06/20/2012 1 23 11 23 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 06/20/2012 1 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping 06/20/2012 1 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps 06/20/2012 1 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 06/20/2012 1 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 06/20/2012 1 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 06/20/2012 1 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 06/20/2012 1 23 74 33 Packaged, Outdoor, Heating and Cooling Makeup Air-

Conditioners 06/20/2012 1

23 82 19 Fan Coil Units 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 24 – 25 (RESERVED) – NOT USED DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 06/20/2012 1 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 06/29/2012 2 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 06/20/2012 1 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 06/29/2012 2 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 06/29/2012 2 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 06/29/2012 2 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 06/29/2012 2 26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 06/29/2012 2 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 06/20/2012 1 26 09 43 Network Lighting Controls 06/20/2012 1 26 24 16 Panelboards 06/29/2012 2 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 06/29/2012 2 26 28 13 Fuses 06/20/2012 1 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 06/29/2012 2 26 43 13 Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical

Power Circuits [DELETED] 06/20/2012 1

26 51 00 Interior Lighting 06/20/2012 1 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications 06/20/2012 1 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 00 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security 06/20/2012 1 28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 29 – 30 (RESERVED) – NOT USED DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 00 00 Earthwork 06/20/2012 1 31 63 33 Drilled Micropiles 06/20/2012 1


DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 00 Flexible Paving 06/20/2012 1 32 13 00 Rigid Paving 06/20/2012 1 32 13 03 Aggregate Base Course 06/20/2012 1 32 14 40 Boulders and Sandstone Block 06/20/2012 1 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers 06/20/2012 1 32 92 23 Sodding 06/20/2012 1 32 93 00 Plants 06/20/2012 1 32 93 01 Soil Preparation 06/20/2012 1 32 93 02 Topsoil 06/20/2012 1 32 93 03 Tree Protection 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 11 00 Water Distribution Utilities 06/20/2012 1 33 40 00 Storm Drainage 06/20/2012 1 DIVISION 34 – 45 (RESERVED) – NOT USED

VOLUME 3

INTERIOR DESIGN MANUAL Finish Specifications 06/20/2012 1 Decorative Lighting Cutsheets 06/20/2012 1 Owner Furnished Contractor Installed Items 06/20/2012 1 [VOLUME 4 – DELETED]

END OF SECTION

Colorado State University 00 01 15 - 1 LIST OF DRAWINGS Durrell Center Revitalization 29 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 00-01-15 LIST OF DRAWINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. The following overall Project Documents, each dated as follows, form a part of the basis for the Contract Documents:

VOLUME 1 – BASE BID

SHEET

NUMBER TITLE DATE ISSUE

GENERAL G0.00 Cover 2012-06-20 1 G0.01 Index 2012-06-29 2 G1.01 G1.02

LEED Boundary Lower Level LEED Boundary Upper Level

2012-06-20 2012-06-20

1 1

CIVIL C0.0 C2.0 C2.1

Site General Notes Utility Plan Utility Details

2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-29

1 2 2

LANDSCAPE L0.01 L0.02 L1.01 L2.01 L2.02 L2.03 L2.04 L4.01 L4.02 L4.03 L4.04 L4.05 L5.01 L5.02 L8.01 L8.02

Cover Sheet General Notes Demolition Plan North Entry Site Plan North Entry Site Plan Enlargement North Entry Tree Protection Plan North Entry Planting Plan North Entry Irrigation Demolition Irrigation Cover Sheet Irrigation Plan Irrigation Details Irrigation Details Grading Plan North Entry Grading Plan Enlargement North Entry Site Details Planting Details

2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION AD2.01 Demolition Plan Lower Level 2012-06-29 2 AD2.02 Demolition Plan Upper Level 2012-06-29 2


ARCHITECTURAL A0.02 General Information 2012-06-29 2 A0.10 Code Summary 2012-06-20 1 A0.11 Code Plan Lower Level 2012-06-20 1 A0.12 A0.13

Code Plan Upper Level Accessibility Mounting Heights

2012-06-20 2012-06-20

1 1

A2.01 Floor Plan Lower Level 2012-06-29 2 A2.02 Floor Plan Upper Level 2012-06-29 2 A2.03 Roof Plan 2012-06-20 1 A2.04 Upper Roof Plan [DELETED] 2012-06-20 1 A2.11 Finish Plan Lower Level 2012-06-29 2 A3.01 Building Elevations 2012-06-20 1 A3.02 Building Elevations 2012-06-20 1 A3.11 Building Sections 2012-06-20 1 A3.20 Wall Section & Enlarged Elevation 2012-06-20 1 A3.21 Wall Section & Enlarged Elevation 2012-06-20 1 A3.22 Wall Section & Enlarged Elevation 2012-06-20 1 A3.23 Wall Section & Enlarged Elevation 2012-06-20 1 A3.24 Wall Section & Enlarged Elevation 2012-06-20 1 A3.25 Wall Section & Enlarged Elevation 2012-06-20 1 A3.26 Wall Section & Enlarged Elevation 2012-06-20 1 A3.27 Wall Section & Enlarged Elevation 2012-06-20 1 A3.28 Wall Section & Enlarged Elevation 2012-06-20 1 A4.11 Enlarged Plan 2012-06-29 2 A4.12 Enlarged Plan 2012-06-20 1 A4.13 Enlarged Plan 2012-06-20 1 A4.14 Enlarged Plan 2012-06-20 1 A4.21 Enlarged Plan 2012-06-20 1 A4.22 Enlarged Plan 2012-06-20 1 A4.23 Enlarged Plan 2012-06-20 1 A4.24 A5.01 A5.02 A5.03 A5.10 A6.01 A6.02 A6.11 A6.12 A6.13 A6.14 A6.21 A7.10 A7.11 A7.12 A7.13 A7.14 A8.01 A8.02 A8.03 A8.04 A8.05 A9.01 A9.02 A9.03

Enlarged Plan Lower Level – Interior Elevations – Game, Front Desk & Lounge Lower Level – Interior Elevations – Hall & Mtg Rm Lower Level – Interior Elevations Enlarged Plan & Interior Elevations Reflected Ceiling Plan – Lower Level Reflected Ceiling Plan – Upper Level Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan – Lower Level Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan – Lower Level Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan – Lower Level Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan – Lower Level Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan – Upper Level Stair Plans, Sections & Details Stair Plans, Sections & Details Stair Plans, Sections & Details Stair Plans, Sections & Details Stair Plans, Sections & Details Exterior Details Exterior Details Exterior Details Exterior Details Exterior Details Finish Legend Room Schedule Room Wall Paint Type

2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


A9.20 A9.50 A9.60 A9.61 A9.71 A9.72 A9.81

Interior Details Wall Types Exterior Storefront Types Exterior Storefront Types Door Schedule and Door Types Interior Storefront Types Reception Desk

2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

STRUCTURAL S0.00 General Notes, Legend, Sheet List 2012-06-20 1 S0.01 Special Inspection and Load Keys 2012-06-20 1 S0.02 SD2.00 SD3.00

Typical Details Demolition Plan Lower Level Demolition Plan Upper Level

2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-29

1 2 2

S2.00 Foundation Plan 2012-06-29 2 S3.00 Upper Level Framing Plan 2012-06-29 2 S3.01 S5.00 S5.01 S5.02

Roof Plan Details Details Details

2012-06-29 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20

2 1 1 1

MECHANICAL MD1.00 MD1.01 MD1.02 MD2.01 MD2.02 M0.01

Mechanical Demolition HVAC Underground Level Mechanical Demolition HVAC Plan Lower Level Mechanical Demolition HVAC Plan Upper Level Mechanical Demolition Hydronic Plan Lower Level Mechanical Demolition Hydronic Plan Upper Level Mechanical Notes and Symbols Legend

2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-20

2 2 2 2 2 1

M1.00 Mechanical HVAC Underground Level 2012-06-29 2 M1.01 Mechanical HVAC Plan Lower Level 2012-06-29 2 M1.02 M1.03 M2.01 M2.02 M3.01 M5.01 M5.02 M6.01

Mechanical HVAC Plan Upper Level Mechanical HVAC Roof Plan Mechanical Hydronic Plan Lower Level Mechanical Hydronic Plan Upper Level Enlarged Mechanical Room Plan Lower Level Mechanical Details Mechanical Details Mechanical Schematic Diagrams

2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-29

2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2

M7.01 Mechanical Control Sequences 2012-06-20 1 PLUMBING PD1.01 Plumbing Demolition Plan Lower Level 2012-06-29 2 PD1.02 Plumbing Demolition Plan Upper Level 2012-06-29 2 P1.00 Plumbing Plan Foundation 2012-06-29 2 P1.01 Plumbing Plan Lower Level 2012-06-20 1 P1.01B Plumbing Plan Foundation [RENAMED P1.00] 2012-06-20 1 P1.02 Plumbing Plan Upper Level 2012-06-29 2 P1.03 Plumbing Roof Plan 2012-06-29 2 P3.01 Enlarged Plumbing Floor Plans 2012-06-20 1 P5.01 Plumbing Details 2012-06-29 2 P6.01 Plumbing Schedules 2012-06-29 2 P6.02 Plumbing Schedules 2012-06-20 1


ELECTRICAL ED2.01 Electrical Power Demolition Plan Lower Level 2012-06-20 1 ED2.02 Electrical Power Demolition Plan Upper Level 2012-06-20 1 ED5.01 Electrical Demolition One-Line Diagram 2012-06-20 1 E0.01 E1.00 E1.01 E1.02 E1.03 E2.01 E2.02 E2.03 E3.01 E3.02 E3.03 E5.01 E6.01 E6.02 E6.03 E7.01

Electrical Legend Electrical Site Plan Electrical Lighting Plan Lower Level Electrical Lighting Plan Upper Level Electrical Lighting Roof Plan Electrical Power Plan Lower Level Electrical Power Plan Upper Level Electrical Power Plan Roof Enlarged Kitchen Electrical Plan Enlarged Kitchen Electrical Plan Electrical Schedules Electrical One-Line Diagram Electrical Schedules Electrical Schedules Electrical Schedules Electrical Diagrams

2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-20

1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1

TELECOMMUNICATIONS T2.01 Building Area Electrical Telecommunication Plan Lower Level 2012-06-29 2 T2.02 Building Area Electrical Telecommunication Plan Upper Level 2012-06-29 2 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT QF2.02 QF4.01 QF4.01A QF4.01B QF4.01C QF4.01D QF4.01E QF4.02 QF4.02A QF4.02B QF4.02C QF4.02D QF4.03 QF4.03A QF4.03B QF4.03C QF4.03D QF5.01 QF5.02 QF5.03 QF5.04 QF5.05 QF5.06 QF5.07 QF5.08 QF5.09 QF5.10

Upper Level Overall Foodservice Equipment Plan Upper Level Foodservice Equipment Plan Upper Level Foodservice Building Conditions and Ventilation Plan Upper Level Foodservice Plumbing Rough-in Plan Upper Level Foodservice Electrical Rough-in Plan Upper Level Foodservice Utility Schedule Upper Level Foodservice Utility Schedule Upper Level Foodservice Equipment Plan Upper Level Foodservice Building Conditions and Ventilation Plan Upper Level Foodservice Plumbing Rough-in Plan Upper Level Foodservice Electrical Rough-in Plan Upper Level Foodservice Utility Schedule Upper Level Foodservice Equipment Plan Upper Level Foodservice Building Conditions and Ventilation Plan Upper Level Foodservice Plumbing Rough-in Plan Upper Level Foodservice Electrical Rough-in Plan Upper Level Foodservice Utility Schedule Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding

2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20

1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


QF5.11 QF5.12 QF5.13 QF5.14 QF5.15 QF5.16 QF5.17 QF5.18 QF6.01 QF7.01 QF8.01 QF8.02 QF8.03 QF8.04 QF9.01 QF9.02 QF9.03 QF10.01 QF11.01 QF12.01 QF13.01 QF13.02 QF13.03 QF14.01

Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Counter Cladding Dish Machine Details Walk-In Cooler Details Exhaust Hood Details Exhaust Hood Details Exhaust Hood Details Exhaust Hood Details Foodservice Elevations Foodservice Elevations Foodservice Elevations Wok #329 Details #111 Pulper/Extractor with Control Panel Details Dishroom Details Standard Details Standard Details Standard Details Power Soak Sink Details

2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

INTERIOR DESIGN ID2.01 ID2.02 ID3.02 ID4.02 ID5.01 ID5.02 ID5.03 ID5.04 ID5.05 ID5.06 ID5.07 ID5.08 ID5.09 ID6.02 ID7.01 ID7.02 ID7.03 ID7.04 ID7.05 ID7.06 ID7.07 ID7.08 ID7.09 ID7.10 ID8.01 ID8.02 ID8.03 ID8.04 ID8.05

General Notes Upper Level Key Plan Upper Level Furniture / Power Plan Upper Level Floor Finish Plan Upper Level Interior Elevations Upper Level Interior Elevations Upper Level Interior Elevations Upper Level Interior Elevations Upper Level Interior Elevations Upper Level Interior Elevations Upper Level Interior Elevations Upper Level Interior Elevations Upper Level Restrooms Upper Level Reflected Ceiling Plan Partial Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan Partial Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan Partial Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan Partial Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan Partial Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan Partial Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan Ceiling Feature Geometry Plan Ceiling Panel Details Ceiling Panel Details Typical Details Wall Base Details Wall Cap Details Finish Transition Details Flex Dining Details Flex Dining Details

2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-20 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-29 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1


ID8.06 ID8.07 ID8.08 ID8.09

Radiator Cover Details Sandwich Venue Wall Sandwich Venue Wall Details Sandwich Venue Wall Details

2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20 2012-06-20

1 1 1 1

AUDIO VIDEO AV2.01 Audio Video Systems Floor Plan Lower Level 2012-06-20 1 AV2.02 Audio Video Systems Floor Plan Upper Level 2012-06-20 1 AV3.01 Audio Video Systems Partial Elevations 2012-06-20 1 AV3.02 Audio Video Systems Partial Elevations 2012-06-20 1 AV4.01 Audio Video Systems Enlarged Lower Level – Area 1 2012-06-20 1 AV4.02 Audio Video Systems Enlarged Lower Level – Area 2 2012-06-20 1 AV4.03 Audio Video Systems Enlarged Lower Level – Area 3 2012-06-20 1 AV4.04 Audio Video Systems Enlarged Lower Level – Area 4 2012-06-20 1 AV6.01 Audio Video Systems RCP Lower Level 2012-06-20 1 AV6.02 Audio Video Systems RCP Upper Level 2012-06-20 1 AV9.01 Audio Video Systems One-Line Diagrams 2012-06-20 1 AV9.02 Audio Video Systems One-Line Diagrams 2012-06-20 1 AV9.03 Audio Video Systems Details 2012-06-20 1 AV9.04 Audio Video Systems Details 2012-06-20 1

VOLUME 2 – ALTERNATES

SHEET NUMBER

TITLE DATE ISSUE

GENERAL G0.00 Cover 2012-06-20 1 G0.01 Index 2012-06-20 1 ALTERNATE # 1 AL1.01 Alternate No. 1 – Demo Lower Level 2012-06-20 1 AL1.02 Alternate No. 1 – Demo Upper Level 2012-06-20 1 AL1.03 Alternate No. 1 – Lower Level 2012-06-20 1 AL1.04 Alternate No. 1 – Upper Level 2012-06-20 1 AL1.05 Alternate No. 1 – Elevations 2012-06-20 1 AL1.06 Alternate No. 1 – Elevations 2012-06-20 1 AL1.07 Alternate No. 1 – Exterior Storefront Types 2012-06-20 1 AL1.08 Alternate No. 1 – Exterior Storefront Types 2012-06-20 1 AL1.09 Alternate No. 1 – Exterior Storefront Types 2012-06-20 1 SL1.01 Alt No.1 2012-06-20 1 ALTERNATE #2 PL2.01 Alternate No.2 – Dish Accumulator 2012-06-20 1 QFL2.01 Alternate #2 Dish Accumulator Foodservice Equipment Plan 2012-06-20 1


ALTERNATE #3 PL3.01 Alternate No.3 – Pot Wash 2012-06-20 1 QFL3.01 Alternate #3 Pot Wash Foodservice Equipment Plan 2012-06-20 1 ALTERNATE #4 AL4.01 Alternate No. 4 – Exterior Dining Deck SL4.01 Alt No.4 2012-06-20 1 PL4.01 Alternate No.4 – Dining Deck 2012-06-20 1 EL4.01 Alternate No.4 – Exterior Dining Deck 2012-06-20 1 ALTERNATE #5 AL5.01 Alternate No. 5 – Exterior Window Shades ALTERNATE #6 AL6.01 Alternate No. 6 – Upper Level Lighting 2012-06-20 1 EL6.01 Alternate No.6 – Upper Level Lighting 2012-06-20 1 ALTERNATE #7 LL7.01 Site Plan Add Alternate #7 – North Landscape Seating Area & Add Alt

Planting 2012-06-20 1

LL7.02 Site Plan Add Alternate #7 – North Landscape Seating Area & Add Alt

Planting 2012-06-20 1

LL7.03 Irrigation Cover Sheet 2012-06-20 1 LL7.04 North Landscape Seeding and Additional Planting 2012-06-20 1 LL7.05 Grading Plan Add Alt #7 – North Landscape Seating Area & Add Alt

Planting 2012-06-20 1

ALTERNATE #8 LL8.01 Demolition Plan Add Alt #8 – South Lawn Regrading and Turf

Replacement 2012-06-20 1

LL8.02 Site Plan Add Alt #8 – South Lawn Regrading and Turf Replacement 2012-06-20 1 LL8.03 Tree Protection Plan Add Alt #8 – South Lawn Regrading & Turf

Replacement 2012-06-20 1

LL8.04 Planting Plan Add Alt #8 – South Lawn Regrading & Turf Replacement

2012-06-20 1

LL8.05 Irrigation Demolition 2012-06-20 1 LL8.06 South Lawn Regrading and Turf Replacement 2012-06-20 1 LL8.07 Grading Plan Add Alt #8 – South Lawn Regrading & Turf Replacement 2012-06-20 1 ALTERNATE #9 ML9.01 Alternate No.9 – Site Hydronic Piping Plan 2012-06-20 1


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION

Not Used END OF SECTION

Colorado State University 00 93 00.01 - 1 ADDENDUM 1 Durrell Center Revitalization 29 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 00 93 00.01 ADDENDUM 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General. B. Definitions. C. Description. D. Pertaining to the Specifications. E. Pertaining to the Drawings. F. Pertaining to Bidders’ Questions. 1.02 GENERAL

A. Subject to THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT, the requirements of the Contract Documents and Divisions 00 and 01 govern the Work of this Section.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Delta: A triangle drawn on the Drawings with a number within to identify a change within the Drawings; the number in the Delta is sequential for the set of Drawings and not per individual Drawing.

B. Cloud: A cloud-like (bubble-like) line on the Drawings to show extent of a change; every

cloud would be identified with a Delta. 1.04 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Except as may be otherwise described, the materials and workmanship for the Work hereinafter specified shall comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Revisions to Specification Sections are identified with bold, italic font. 2. Revisions to Drawings are identified with a “delta” and “cloud”.

B. Previous Revisions: To avoid confusion of previous revisions to current revisions, previous revisions are identified as follows:

1. Previous revisions to Specification Sections are identified as italic font only. 2. Previous revisions to Drawings are identified with a “delta” only.

1.05 PERTAINING TO THE SPECIFICATIONS

A. Section 00 01 10 – Table of Contents: Issued revised Specification Sections.

B. Section 00 01 15 – List of Drawings: Issued revised list of drawings. C. Section 00 93 00.01 – Addendum 1: Issued Addendum 1 Specification Section.


D. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work: Issued revised Contractor’s Use of Premises to include work restrictions for fall move-in, winter and spring finals weeks, and commencement.

E. Section 11 40 00 – Foodservice Equipment: Issued revisions including item numbers 41, 42, 111, 121, 129, 198, 240, and 334.

F. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Issued revisions including:

1. Phase protection added for polyphase motors above 5 hp.

G. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Issued revisions

including:

1. Deleted references to specification sections not in this project.

H. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems: Issued revisions including:

1. Corrected product manufacturer references.

I. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Issued revisions including:

1. Deleted references to scopes of work not in this project. 2. Corrected product manufacturer references.

J. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Issued revisions including:


K. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Issued revisions including:

1. Deleted items from Identification Schedule that are not relevant to this project.

L. Section 26 05 73 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study: Issued revisions including:

1. Noted SKM as sole source for software per direction from Owner. 2. Modified and added details and requirements for Section 3.05 Arc-Flash Study.

M. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards: Issued revisions including:

1. Corrected product manufacturer references. 2. Noted Square D as sole source for equipment per direction from Owner. 3. Deleted product references to types of equipment not used on this project.

N. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Issued revisions including:

1. Deleted product references to types of equipment not used on this project. 2. Deleted references to Extra Materials of equipment not used on this project. 3. Deleted references to Occupancy Sensors – this equipment is covered under

Section 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices and additional specific requirements are noted on plans.


O. Section 26 28 16 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Issued revisions including:


1. Deleted references to types of equipment not used on this project. 2. Corrected product manufacturer references.

P. Section 26 43 13 - Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits: Specification Section deleted.

Q. Volume 3 (Cut Sheets): 1. LT-H: Revised light fixture/manufacturer. 2. LT-R: Revised spec notes. 3. SC-353: Revised manufacturer contact information. 4. SC-358: Revised manufacturer contact information. 5. SC-360: Revised manufacturer contact information. 6. SC-361: Revised manufacturer contact information.

1.06 PERTAINING TO THE DRAWINGS

A. General

1. Sheet G0.01 a. Updated Sheet Index.

B. Civil

1. Sheet C2.0

a. Changed the wet well size from a 9’ x 9’ square and set the bottom of the wet well at elevation 5010.00.

2. Sheet C2.1 b. Changed the size of the wet well in detail #14 to 6’ x 6’ square by 9’ deep.

C. Architectural Demolition

1. Sheet AD2.01

a. Revised floor slab demolition boundary at new north atrium and student lounge area.

b. Revised floor slab demolition boundary near south vestibule. c. Trench added for new sanitary line near 2/D. d. Revised ceiling demolition area to include room 118. e. Core drilled holes through existing shear wall added for new plumbing.

2. Sheet AD2.02

a. Revised floor slab demolition boundary to match structural demolition drawings.

b. Clarifications to floor sink leader notes. c. Boundary of ceiling demolition adjusted to match scope shown in ID

drawings.

D. Architectural

1. Sheet A0.02 a. Abbreviations updated. b. General note #23 revised. c. General note #38 added.

2. Sheet A2.01

a. Existing handrails near doors 115B and 117A added to floor plan.


b. Hatched area indicating no architectural work revised to include rooms 111 and 112.

3. Sheet A2.02

a. Foodservice equipment and dining seating layout added to floor plan for reference (no change to scope of work).

4. Sheet A2.04

a. Sheet deleted.

5. Sheet A2.11 a. “ADD ALTERNATE SCOPE” note on hatched areas revised to “NO

WORK TO FLOOR FINISHES” b. Added handrail at south entry ramp per SAFEbuilt request.

6. Sheet A4.11 a. Added handrail at south entry ramp per SAFEbuilt request.

7. Sheet A7.14 a. Added handrail at south entry ramp per SAFEbuilt request.

E. Structural Demolition

1. Sheet SD2.00

a. Legend added. b. North slab demolition area revised. c. West retaining wall demolition note revised. d. Note added for core drilling at south shear wall.

2. Sheet SD3.00

a. Legend added.

F. Structural

1. Sheet S2.00 a. North slab on grade revised.

2. Sheet S3.00

a. North low roof dimensions revised.

3. Sheet S3.01 a. North high roof dimensions revised. b. Note added to fill existing roof hatch.

G. Mechanical Demolition

1. Sheet MD1.00

a. Demolition for floor return air grille indicated.

2. Sheet MD1.01 a. The extent of exhaust ductwork demolition was revised. b. The existing condition of fan coil units in the southwest corner of the

building was revised.

3. Sheet MD1.02 a. Existing cabinet unit heater key notes were revised.


4. Sheet MD2.01

a. Existing cabinet unit heater key notes were revised.

5. Sheet MD2.02 a. Existing cabinet unit heater key notes were revised.

H. Mechanical

1. Sheet M1.00

a. Revisions made to the keynotes and to the existing under slab duct being reused.

2. Sheet M1.01

a. Ductwork routings changed and coordinated with ceilings. b. Indoor unit of the mini split system serving the elevator equipment room

located on the plans. c. Revised floor grille. d. Changes to new exhaust ductwork.

3. Sheet M1.02 a. Additional air devices added to the MAU air distribution. b. Grease exhaust for H-1, and H-3 revised. c. Grease exhaust and MUA roof penetrations revised to align with roof

structure d. Added air to unoccupied room for communications equipment. e. Revised OSA duct for H-6 to remove duct/column conflict.

4. Sheet M1.03 a. Outdoor condensing unit portion of the mini split system serving the

elevator equipment room located on the plans. b. MUA/EF units split into individual pieces of equipment with individual roof

curbs, and locations modified to align with roof structure.

5. Sheet M2.01 a. Existing cabinet unit quantities adjusted in the southwest corner.

6. Sheet M2.02 a. Existing S/R piping in the northeast corner of the building and associated

keynote revised.

7. Sheet M6.01 a. The split system a/c unit for the elevator equipment room was scheduled. b. Makeup Air Unit and Exhaust Fan Schedules changed to provide MAUs

and EFs with individual curbs in lieu of shared curbs for coordination with waffle slab spacing.

c. The Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule revised to include additional air devices.

I. Plumbing Demolition

1. Sheet PD1.01

a. Original dish room plumbing area located on plan in correct location. b. Server room plumbing area located on plan with notes.

2. Sheet PD1.02


a. Original dish room plumbing area located on plan in correct location. b. Server room plumbing demolition noted.

J. Plumbing

1. Sheet P1.00

a. Under slab drain piping shown from elevator pit to rise up to lower level ceiling space.

b. General note added for location of symbols legend location.

2. Sheet P1.01 a. Revised drain and waste piping to route primarily beneath architectural

ceiling “cloud” locations. b. Water and vent piping routed in new location for new south rest room

group. c. Water piping extended to riser locations one to the south one to the

north.

3. Sheet P1.02 a. Water supply piping for makeup air units added in ceiling space. b. In several locations water supply piping for kitchen equipment added. c. Additional emergency gas shut off valve added near south rest room

group. d. Vent risers and vent thru roof locations added.

4. Sheet P1.03 a. Gas piping support noted. b. Make-up water to MAU’s

5. Sheet P5.01 a. Removed reference to dry valve system in fire protection entry detail #1.

6. Sheet P6.01 a. Pump Schedule revisions. b. Gas Schedule existing gas appliances added to schedule.

K. Electrical

1. Sheet E1.01

a. Game Room lighting redesign. b. Lighting control system 'master off' low voltage switches were added near

the north and south entrances. c. The emergency lighting UPS was moved from the upper level to the lower

level. d. At the Seminar/Classroom, fixture type B2 locations were revised. e. At the Hall, (1) fixture type R1S eliminated.

2. Sheet E1.02

a. At dining, fixture type H3 was eliminated and replaced with fixture type B6. b. At venues, fixture types J1, J2, and J3 were replaced with fixture types and

LT-W. c. At Flex Dining 208, fixture type J1 was replaced with fixture type LT-V. d. At the salad/deli venue, (2) fixtures, type B1A were added. e. A lighting control system 'master off' low voltage switch was added near the

kitchen. f. Power was added for new decorative lighting fixtures located in the Flex

Dining.


3. Sheet E2.01

a. Added ESP-1 elevator sump pump to elevator pit. b. Deleted fire alarm system devices at elevator – moved to drawing T2.01. c. The emergency lighting UPS and panel E1 was moved from the upper level

to the lower level. d. Added circuit number for FACP. e. Added sump pumps SP-1, SP-2 & SP-3 near Storage 101A. f. Added label and control power circuit for LCPA in Seminar/Classroom 114.

4. Sheet E2.02 a. Deleted fire alarm system devices at elevator – moved to drawing T2.02. b. The emergency lighting UPS and panel E1 was moved from the upper level

to the lower level.

5. Sheet E2.03 a. Added roof top weatherproof GFI receptacles for mechanical equipment

maintenance.

6. Sheet E3.01 a. Modified equipment locations at Dex serving area to match food service

plans. b. Indicated equipment mounted sub-panel K81 at Grill venue. c. Modified sub-panel K42 location in Dex. d. Deleted note that was outside of enlarged plan area.

7. Sheet E3.02

a. Indicated equipment mounted sub-panels K262, K279 and K291 at Salad/Desert venue.

b. Indicated equipment mounted sub-panel K324 at Noodles venue. c. Indicated equipment mounted sub-panel K181 at International/Pizza venue.

8. Sheet E5.01

a. Added feeder designations for kitchen sub-panels fed from panel B3. b. Changed elevator horsepower, feeder, and over current protection. c. Added key note #5 to feeder from junction box to panel B1. d. Modified key note #10 for sump pump control panel.

9. Sheet E6.01

a. Fixture types H3, J1, J2, and J3 were removed. b. Fixture type P3 was revised. c. Fixture type R1P was added. d. Fixture type LT-M1 was revised to types LT-M1 and LT-M2. e. Fixture types LT-V and LT-W were added.

10. Sheet E6.02

a. Added circuit for Alt #3 EF-9 in panel B1. b. Added circuits for DDC controller and CU-1/IU-1 in panel A2.

11. Sheet E6.03

a. Added EF-9 for Alt #3 in Mechanical Equipment Schedule. b. Added IU-1 a CU-1 to Mechanical Equipment Scheudle. c. Changed motor horsepower for sump pumps SP-1, SP-2, SP-3 in

Mechanical Equipment Schedule.

L. Telecommunications


1. Sheet T2.01 a. Added data drop for mechanical DDC controller. b. Added fire alarm system devices at elevator and elevator control room. c. Added fire alarm smoke detector at FACP location. d. Added fire alarm visual strobe device at Restroom/Shower 109. e. Added manual pull station alarms to each of the entry doors along the west

side of the building. f. Moved manual pull station out of Vestibule N100 into Entry Lobby N101.

2. Sheet T2.02

a. Added fire alarm system devices at elevator.

M. Foodservice

1. Sheet QF4.01C a. Electrical load centers have been added to counters #41 and #42. The

load centers will be connected to wall mounted panels that are specified by the electrical engineer.

2. Sheet QF4.01D

a. The utility schedule has been modified to reflect the changes shown on sheet QF4.01C.

N. Interior Design

1. Sheet ID6.02

a. Revised locations of LT-H; added fixtures to the salad/deli venue. b. Added LT-S monorail track light fixtures to the suspended ceiling panels

at the condiment counters.

2. Sheet ID7.02 a. Added signage location.

3. Sheet ID7.03

a. Added signage location.

4. Sheet ID7.04 a. Added signage locations.

5. Sheet ID7.06 a. Revised locations of LT-H; added fixtures to the salad/deli venue.


7. Sheet ID7.08

a. Revised locations of LT-H; added fixtures to the salad/deli venue.


O. Alternate #4

1. Sheet EL4.01 a. Keynote added.

1.07 PERTAINING TO BIDDERS’ QUESTIONS


A. Bidders’ Questions:

1. Q: Per spec section 11 40 00 section 1.07.A., itemized pricing is required at bid

time for each foodservice item. Is a form available for this submission or shall we create our own form?

A: Itemized pricing will not be required at the time of bid; it will be required following the award of the contract, within ten days of Notice to Proceed. Refer to revised Section 11 40 00 1.07.A.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION

Colorado State University 01 10 00 - 1 SUMMARY OF WORK Durrell Center Revitalization 29 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 - Addendum #1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Definitions.

B. General.

C. Contracts/Scope.

D. Work Sequence

E. Work Under Other Contracts.

F. Owner Furnished Work.

G. Prior to Start of Work.

H. Owner’s Occupancy Requirements.

I. Contractor’s Use of Premises.

J. Construction Activity and Control.

K. References.

L. Investigation. 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to additional definitions as defined by Division 00 70 00 General Conditions.

B. Agency: Principal Representative, as defined by Division 00 70 00 General Conditions.

C. Authorities Having Jurisdiction: Federal, State and local municipality authorities whose codes and regulations govern over all aspects of the Project.

D. Design-Build: For the purpose of this Project, Design-Build shall mean a method where

the Contractor shall be responsible for both finalizing the design, having the drawings and related documents reviewed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, if applicable, and construction services of a specific product, based on a design concept, performance or criteria set by Architect or its Consultants in the Drawings or Specifications.

E. Final Acceptance: As defined by Division 00 70 00 General Conditions.

F. NIC – Not in Contract: Work that is under separate contract and not part of this Contract.

G. OFCI – Owner Furnished Contractor Installed: Referring to any work, equipment and devices, and fixtures, furnishing and accessories that will be provided by the Owner, but installed by the Contractor as part of this Contract.


H. Owner – The term “Owner” shall mean the Principal Representative, as defined by Division 00-70-00 General Conditions.

I. Punch List: A list of items of Work that the Architect issues after review of the Work that is incomplete and non-compliant with the Contract Documents. It is intended to identify minor Work to be completed in the process of executing a Notice of Substantial Completion and not for whole building systems.

J. Substantial Completion: As defined by Division 00 70 00 General Conditions.

K. Work by Others: Work that is under separate contract and are not part of this Contract.

1.03 GENERAL

A. Subject to THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT, the requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Contract Documents and Divisions 00 and 01 govern the Work of this Section.

1.04 CONTRACTS/SCOPE

A. Work of this Contract comprises the general construction for the Durrell Center Revitalization at Colorado State University in the City of Fort Collins in the State of Colorado.

1. The Work consists of general construction of said Work, as shown on the

Drawings and described in the Specification, of the following: a. Selective demolition of interior and exterior building elements. b. Site improvements and utility work. c. Construction of building addition including new elevator. d. Interior construction of Dining Hall including “food court” market place for

food service and preparation. i. Provide qualifications of Food Service contractor as required in

specifications. d. Interior construction of student amenity and meeting spaces.

B. Construct the Work under THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT, which includes Drawings

and Specifications, including General and Supplementary Conditions and documents.

C. Scope of Work:

1. The Scope-of-Work includes the Drawings and Specifications included herein and is intended to describe a “complete” Project. a. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing necessary documents

and drawings, as required, for coordination, obtaining permits and installation of Work noted as Design-Build.

2. Consecutive and simultaneous construction activities are proposed for the Project area shown within the Contract Documents. Any references made within these Documents to “OFCI” and “Work by Others” are for the purpose of coordination of contiguous Work. a. The Contractor shall make every effort to verify all conditions of the

jobsite, including, but not limited to, a clear understanding of all contiguous Work.

b. The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying and bringing to the attention of both the Owner and Architect potential conflicts in scheduling and/or other aspects of the performance of Work due to the effect of adjacent Work by Others.


1.05 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with the Owner and Architect. 1.06 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. The Owner reserves the right to enter into separate Contracts for related Work to be completed concurrently with this Contract.

B. Items noted ‘NIC’ or ‘Work by Others’ or ‘OFOI’.

1.07 OWNER FURNISHED WORK

A. Specific Work to be furnished and installed by the Owner (OFOI): 1. Fire Alarm. 2. Data Cabling. 3. Radio Amplification. 4. Wireless Transmitters. 5. Fixtures and Furnishings.

B. Owner’s Responsibilities: 1. Coordinate with the Contractor and its subcontractors relative to all said Work. 2. Arrange and pay for Product delivery to the jobsite. 3. On delivery, inspect Products jointly with the Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective or

deficient items. 5. Arrange for Manufacturers’ warranties, inspections and service.

C. Contractor’s Responsibilities:

1. Coordinate Work with subcontractors and suppliers relative to all said Work. 2. Coordinate Work with the Owner and its Consultants, Contractors and Suppliers

relative to all said Work. 3. Receive and unload Products at the jobsite; inspect for completeness or damage

jointly with Owner. 4. Handle, store, install and finish Products. 5. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt at no cost to the Owner. 6. Clean Products for Project Closeout.

1.08 PRIOR TO START OF WORK

A. The Contractor’s activities necessary to plan the Work, including, but not limited to the following list, along with any other General Conditions and Technical Specification requirements, must be complete prior to the start of the Work. Written acceptance by the Owner for each item is required before the Contractor may proceed with any actual construction on or off the site. 1. Mobilization Schedule. 2. Submittal Schedule. 3. Site Condition Report. 4. Quality Control Pan. 5. Safety Program Plan. 6. Construction Waste Management Pan. 7. Subcontractor Acceptance. 8. Contract Record Maintenance Plan. 9. Superintendent Qualifications. 10. Quality Control Manager Qualifications. 11. Assistant Superintendent Designations. 12. Construction Schedule.


13. Schedule of Contractor’s Misc. Admin. Requirements: the Schedule of Contractor’s Miscellaneous Administrative Requirements category shall cover all other Pre-Work office and job administrative expenses for General Conditions, Special Conditions and Technical Specifications, as defined by the Contractor in a detailed breakdown submitted in writing for approval prior to requesting payment for any item in the Planning and Administrative Phase.

1.09 OWNER’S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with procedures stated in THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT for issuance of the Notice of Substantial Completion, and for the administrative procedures in closing out the Work to provide for an orderly and efficient transfer of the completed Work to the Owner.

B. The Owner may occupy designated portions of the Project for the purpose of installation of equipment and to conduct business, under provisions stated in THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT.

1.10 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PREMISES

A. The Contractor shall have full use of the premises for construction operations of said Work, including use of the Project site, as approved by the Owner, during the construction period. 1. Hours of operation shall be from 7:00am until 5:30pm. 2. No exterior work shall be permitted on the site nor interior work which can

be heard from 50 feet away from the building during the following times: a. Fall Move-In: August 16–17, 2012. b. Finals Week: December 5–15, 2012. c. Finals Week: May 8–18, 2013. d. Commencement: May 17–18: no work on the south si de of the

building during commencement exercises at Moby Aren a.

B. Limit use of premises for Work and for construction operations and to Allow: 1. Work by Others. 2. Access by Owner-authorized personnel. 3. Owner Occupancy. 4. Coordinate use of premises under direction of the Owner and Authorities Having

Jurisdiction. 5. Restrict time for performing the Work as agreed with Owner and Authorities

Having Jurisdiction.

C. Each Contractor and subcontractor shall confine its equipment, storage of materials and operations of its workmen to limits directed by the Owner and as follows: 1. Materials shall not be brought onto the Project site until reasonably required for

progress of the Work. 2. Storage space shall be confined to designated areas of the Project site. When

the site is not in condition to receive a material shipment, the Contractor shall have materials properly stored elsewhere at no additional cost to the Owner, including insurance coverage for off-site storage. Only bonded warehouse facilities shall be used for off-site storage of materials. The Contractor shall secure permission from the Owner prior to any off-site storage of material.

1.11 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall be responsible for reducing pollution from construction activities by controlling soil erosion, waterway sedimentation and airborne dust generation as per requirements set by the EPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency) and other Federal, State and Municipality Authorities Having Jurisdiction.


B. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall be responsible for taking all measure

necessary for diverting construction waste to recycling facilities to reduce amount of waste and dispose to appropriate waste disposing facilities as per the requirements set forth by the EPA and other Federal, State and local municipality Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and LEED.

1.12 REFERENCES

A. For Products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more restrictive requirements are specified or are required by applicable Codes. 1. For list of references, refer to each appropriate Specification Section.

B. The applicable date of the standard is that which in effect as of the Contract Documents

date.

C. Obtain copies of standards when required by the Contract Documents. Maintain one (1) copy each at the jobsite during progress of the specific Work.

1.13 INVESTIGATION

A. The Contractor shall visit the jobsite and acquaint itself with the site conditions.

B. Notwithstanding, the fact that the Owner may have provided subsurface and/or site information, it is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to make its own determinations as to actual site and/or subsurface conditions, and to determine the methods required to accommodate such conditions, and to allow the performance of the Work under the Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

Colorado State University 11 40 00 - 1 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Durrell Center Revitalization 29 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 - Addendum #1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Foodservice equipment. 1.02 RELATED DIVISIONS / SECTIONS:

A. Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable provisions of Division 1 for additional instructions.

B. Refer to Interior Design Divisions for applicable provisions and sections regarding decor

finishes, applications, details, and special instructions relating to items specified in this Section. Applicable to Projects with items specified in this Section, with décor finishes and/or construction.

C. Refer to Mechanical/Plumbing Divisions for applicable provisions and sections regarding

mechanical services, including, but not limited to, rough-ins, grease traps, steam traps, drain traps, atmospheric vents, valves, pipes and pipe fittings, ductwork, and other materials necessary to complete final connections to individual items as specified in this Section. Not work of this Section.

D. Refer to Electrical Divisions for applicable provisions and sections regarding electrical

services, including, but not limited to, rough-ins, wiring, conduit, disconnects and other materials necessary to complete final connections to individual items as specified in this Section. Not work of this Section.

E. Work included in other Divisions - Provision of all wall, floor, and/or ceiling/roof openings,

recesses, sleeves, and/or conduits; and equipment pads, and sealing thereof, as necessary for installation of items included in this section. Not work of this Section.

F. Work included in other Divisions - Disconnection of existing equipment to be relocated

and/or reused; and removal of existing equipment which will not be reused, as determined and designated by the Architect in other Divisions. Not work of this Section. (Applicable to Projects with existing equipment.)

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Furnish - Supply and deliver to Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations. B. Install (set in place) - Operations at Project Site including actual unloading, unpacking,

assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations; ready for final utility connections by other Divisions as appropriate.

C. Provide - Furnish and install complete, ready for intended use.


D. Contractor - Refers to the Kitchen Equipment (Sub) Contractor in this Section. References to any other Contractor or Division, will be specific; such as General Contractor, Plumbing (Sub) Contractor / Division, Electrical (Sub) Contractor / Division, Architect designated, etc.

1.04 SPECIFIER IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM:

A. Omitted.

1.05 LAWS, ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS: A. Comply with the following:

1. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (A.R.I): applicable regulations and

references of the latest edition of standards for remote refrigeration system(s), components and installation.

2. American Gas Association (A.G.A.): standards for gas heated equipment, and provide equipment with the A.G.A. seal. Automatic safety pilots to be provided on all equipment, where available. (Canadian Gas Association or alternate testing lab's seals accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.)

3. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.): Z21-Series for gas-burning equipment. Provide labels indicating name of testing agency.

4. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.): B57.1 for compressed gas cylinder connections, and with applicable standards of the Compressed Gas Association for compressed gas piping.

5. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.): A40.4 and A40.6 for water connection air gaps and vacuum breakers.

6. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (A.S.H.R.A.E.): applicable regulations and references of the latest edition of standards for remote refrigeration system(s), components and installation.

7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (A.S.M.E.): Boiler Code requirements for steam generating and steam heated equipment, and provide A.S.M.E. inspection stamp and registration with National Board.

8. American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.): C1036 for flat glass. 9. American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.): C1048 for heat-treated flat

glass - Kind HS, Kind FT coated and uncoated glass. 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.): F232-03 for pre-rinse

spray units, and in compliance with Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct). 11. American Welding Society (A.W.S.): D1.1 structural welding code. 12. Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct 2005): water savings pre-rinse spray valves. 13. National Electric Code (N.E.C.): N.F.P.A. Volume 5 for electrical wiring and

devices included with foodservice equipment, A.N.S.I. C2 and C73, and applicable N.E.M.A. and N.E.C.A. standards.

14. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (N.E.M.A.): LD3 for high-pressure decorative laminates.

15. National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.): applicable sections for exhaust hoods, ventilators, duct and fan materials, hoods fire suppression systems, wheel placement systems, construction and installation; in addition to local codes and standards.

16. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): latest Standards and Revisions, and as accredited by ANSI, IAS, NELAC, ISO, OSHA and SCC. Provide NSF Seal of Approval on all standard manufactured items included in this Project and listed in any NSF Certified Food Equipment Products Category, and on all items of custom fabricated work included in this Project. (UL Sanitation approval and seal accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.)


17. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (S.M.A.C.N.A.): latest edition of guidelines for seismic restraint of kitchen equipment, as applicable to project location.

18. Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.): as applicable for electrical components and assemblies. Provide either U.L. labeled products or, where no labeling service is available, “recognized markings” to indicate listing in the U.L. “Recognized Component Index”. (Canadian Standards Association or alternate testing lab's seals accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.)

19. UL 300 Standard: for wet chemical fire suppression systems for exhaust hoods/ventilators.

20. American with Disabilities Act (ADA): as applicable to this Project. 21. Refrigeration Service Engineers Society (R.S.E.S.): applicable regulations and

references of the latest edition of standards for remote refrigeration system(s), components and installation.

22. All refrigerants used for any purpose is to comply with the 1995 and 2010 requirements of the Montreal Protocol Agreement, and subsequent revisions and amendments. No CFC or HCFC refrigerants will be permitted on this Project.

23. All refrigeration components installation, repairs, and/or associated work on any refrigeration system, is to be performed by a Certified Refrigeration Mechanic thoroughly familiar with this type commercial foodservice installation.

24. ETL and other national and international recognized Testing and Listing Agencies labels and certifications are acceptable in lieu of Listing Agencies indicated in these documents, if acceptable to the local code jurisdictions.

25. All applicable local codes, standards and regulations. 26. All special local codes, standard, and regulations; such as (examples only)

California Energy Commissions Regulations, Dade County requirements for walk- in cooler(s) and/or freezer(s).

27. For detention facilities projects (as applicable): applicable Correctional Standards. Verify the level of security and construction required with the Architect, and provide all items in compliance.

1.06 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS:

A. In addition to requirements of Related Sections 1.02.A:

1. Provide list of comparable size and scope projects completed in the last five (5) years. 2. Contractor to provide a letter that states they are able to purchase equipment

from all specified manufacturers. 3. Provide the name and contact information of your fabricator, installer and all other subcontractors you will be using on this project. 4. Provide the name and office location of your project manager for this project. The

project manager must be local (Colorado/Wyoming area) in order to be readily available for meetings, coordination and to address conditions in the field. List at least three projects (and contacts) recently completed by your project manager. B. Any major sub-contractor or fabricator employed by Contractor:

1. Their name, address, and a brief summary of their experience and qualifications

is to be submitted with the bid proposal.


1.07 BIDDING AND SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Within ten (10) days of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall provide pricing on

primary manufacturer and model specified; in a form giving itemized prices for each item, with separate total prices for delivery and installation. Any and all city, state, occupational and government taxes which are applicable to this project, shall be included and added as a separate charge. All figures shall be included in a grand total package bid proposal. Bids shall be valid for thirty (30) days after bid deadline date, and shall indicate same. Failure to comply with the above may be cause for rejection of the bid.

B. See Section 01 25 00 – Substitutions and as noted in Article 1.08. C. Substitutions must be approved in writing by the Architect and/or Owner, prior to

utilization in this Contract. A copy of the approval must be included with any submittals by Contractor.

1.08 APPROVED SUBSTITUTIONS AND/OR LISTED ALTERNATES:

A. Substitutions approved as noted in article 1.7, and/or any Listed Alternate manufacturers

included in the Itemized Specifications article 3.10, or added by Addendum, may be utilized, in lieu of the primary specified manufacturer with the following conditions: 1. These Contract Documents are designed and engineered using the primary

specified manufacturer and model. Contractor assumes total responsibility for any deviations required, due to utilization of a substitution/alternate manufacturer or model; including, but not limited to, fitting alternates into available space, providing directions for required changes, and assuming any associated cost for utility, building, architectural, or engineering changes.

2. Contractor is responsible for supplying the model, which is as close as possible to the primary specified model in regards to general function, features, options, sizes, accessories, utility requirements, finish, operation, and listing approvals. If it is determined by the Owner or their appointed representative at any time during the construction and installation, and prior to the final acceptance of the Project, that the substitution/alternate model submitted is not equivalent to the primary specified model, the Contractor will assume all associated cost and implications required to replace the model submitted, with the correct model. 3. The bid proposal is to clearly state any substitutions/alternates, which will

be utilized including the manufacturer and model number. Also Include a data sheet for each substitution/alternate, with any and all deviations between the primary specified manufacturer and the substitution/alternate manufacturer. Cut sheet from manufacturers, will not be acceptable as the data sheet. Complex alternates such as utility distribution systems, exhaust hoods, ventilators, etc. are to include a shop drawing specific to the Project.

4. Inclusion of an alternate manufacturer in Itemized Specifications article 3.10, is not intended to indicate that there is an equal alternate unit to match every primary specified unit. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that the alternate unit submitted matches the primary specified unit; and meets the conditions as stated above.

5. Manufacturers not approved as substitutions, or included as a Listed Alternates will not be permitted.


1.09 DISCREPANCIES: A. Where discrepancies are discovered between the drawings and the specifications,

regarding quality or quantity, the higher quality or the greater quantity is to be included in the Bid Proposal.

B. Contractor is responsible for verifying and coordinating all items provided in this Section,

with the drawings, specifications, manufacturer’s requirements, submittals, actual site conditions, adjacent items, and associated (Sub-) Contractors; to assure that there are no discrepancies or conflicts. This is to include, but not be limited to, quantities, dimensions, clearances required, direction of operation, door swings, utilities, fabrication details and methods, installation requirements, etc.

C. Contractor to notify the Architect, in writing, of any discrepancies discovered; and await

written clarification prior to proceeding with the items or areas in question.

1.10 SUBMITTALS: A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. See Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures, for substitution procedures allowed only

during the bid process.

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA MANUALS: A. Two (2) bound sets of manuals are to be furnished for items of standard manufacture

on/or before the date of the first event to occur of the following: demo/start-up, start-up for intended use by the Owner/Operator, completion of installation of kitchen equipment contract package, or final acceptance of installation by Owner. Manuals are to be in alphabetical order according to manufacturer. Manufacturer’s info is to include Tech Services telephone number, email, and web site address, where available.

B. Provide a complete list of local service agencies for included manufacturers, complete

with address and telephone numbers. Also provide email and web site addresses, where available.

C. Provide video tapes and/or CD’s for maintenance, training, operation, etc, where available

from the manufacturer. D. Manual shall also include a leak testing report for each and every remote refrigerated

system included under this Foodservice Equipment Section, as required in article 2.6.A.6 Refrigeration Equipment of this Section.

1.12 AS-BUILT/ RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Maintain one record set of Foodservice Equipment Plans with any related corrections,

revisions, additions, deletions, changes, etc. noted during construction and installation. Provide an "as-built" set in reproducible transparency form and electronic computer disk form.

B. Provide one (1) final set of Product Data Submittal Manual with any related corrections,

revisions, additions, deletions, changes, etc. noted during construction and installation as a specifications record set.

C. These documents are to be provided at the same time as the O & M Data Manuals.


1.13 SCHEDULE: A. Time is of the essence and acceptance constitutes assurance that the Contractor can and

will obtain materials, equipment and manpower, to permit installation of the items included in this Section, on schedule. Contractor is to coordinate their work with the progress schedule, as prepared and updated periodically by the General Contractor or Construction Manager.

B. Anticipated delays, not within the control of the Contractor, are to be noted in a written

notification to the Architect, immediately upon the Contractor's realization that delays are imminent.

C. Failure of manufacturers to meet promised delivery dates will not grant relief to the

Contractor for failure to meet schedules; unless the Contractor can establish, in writing, that orders were received by the manufacturer, with reasonable lead times.

D. Extra charges resulting from special handling or air shipment in order to meet the

schedule will be paid by the Contractor, if insufficient time was allowed in placing factory orders.

1.14 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION RESPONSIBILITY:

A. Contractor is responsible for coordinating with all applicable Design Team members,

General Contractor, other Contractors and/or Sub-Contractors and Trades involved in this Project and associated with any items or work provided under this Section; as required for the successful provision, installation, completion, and functioning of these items and/or work, and the Project in general. This is to include, but not be limited to, exchange of shop drawings, details, and manufacturer’s information, supplying templates or actual components to be installed in or on items provided by other Sections, for coordination; and coordinating with and between their own internal staff, sub-contractors, trades, manufacturers, fabricators and installers, for compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor responsible for obtaining any documents referenced in this Section and on any

associated drawings, which contains information relative to the performance of this Contract; and disseminating and coordinating the pertinent information contained in them, with the appropriate sub-contractors, manufacturers, fabricators, and/or installers.

1.15 PRODUCT HANDLING:

A. Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer's containers, fully identified with

manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size, color, item number, area, etc. B. Contractor is responsible for receiving and warehousing equipment and fixtures, until

ready for installation. Store materials, equipment and fixtures in sealed containers, where possible. Store off the ground and under cover, protected from damage.

C. Contractor to verify and coordinate conditions at the building site, particularly door and/or

wall openings, and passages, to assure access for all equipment. Pieces too bulky for existing facilities are to be hoisted or otherwise handled with apparatus as required. All special handling equipment charges will be arranged for and paid for by Contractor.


1.16 PRODUCT PROTECTION: A. To the best of their abilities, Contractor is to protect their equipment against theft or

damage, until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Use all means reasonable to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after

installation; and to protect the associated work and materials of the other trades. C. Pre-fabricated walk-in coolers/freezers are not to be used as general storage; and should

be locked before leaving the site daily. Damage and theft resulting from failure to secure units will be repaired or replaced at Contractor's expense.

D. No architectural walls, ceilings, décor, structural components or any other details may be

physically attached to, into, or rest on any walk-in wall, ceiling panel(s), or component thereof. Contractor is responsible for coordinating this requirement with other Contractors.

1.17 WARRANTY:

A. Unless otherwise noted in Related Divisions / Sections 1.2.A, items furnished are to be

fully guaranteed against defects in workmanship, materials, and functionality for one full year from the date of the first event to occur of the following: date of issue of Certificate Of Occupancy (or the equivalent), start-up for intended use by the Owner/Operator, completion of installation of kitchen equipment contract package, or final acceptance of installation by Owner. Should a Temporary Certificate Of Occupancy be issued for partial completion of work, the items furnished within that designated area are to be under warranty from the date of issue of that Certificate. Contractor or their service agent will make necessary repairs and replacements without charge to the Owner, and within a reasonable time.

B. Additional Refrigeration Warranty: in addition to the one-year warranty requirements as

stated above, provide start-up, and parts and labor for the first year; plus additional four-year extended warranty on compressors. Extended warranty is for provision of replacement compressor, determined to be defective by a Certified refrigeration mechanic. However verification of defective compressor, installation of replacement compressor, recharging and repairs of system will be the responsibility of the Owner. This includes all items with built-in or remote refrigeration system.

C. Periodic routine maintenance, servicing, adjustments, cleaning, etc., as required by the

manufacturers included in this Project, are the responsibility of the Owner. D. Any and all parts or requirements for manufacturer’s warranties to be in effect, whether or

not noted in the itemized specifications, are to be provided or complied with by the Contractor. This is to include, but not be limited to, particular parts, accessories, or installation; installation supervision, start-up, and/or follow-up inspections required by factory trained, Certified, and/or authorized personnel. Factory training, Certification, and/or authorization is to be in effect at the time of bidding, installation, start-up, and warranty period of this Project.

E. Manufacturer’s warranties which comply with the requirements of this Warranty article

1.17, are to be provided in lieu of Contractor’s own warranties, where available. Copies of the written warranties are to be included in the O & M Manuals.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT:

A. Refer to schedule on Foodservice Drawings and Section 3.10 Itemized Specifications for

equipment included in this Section.

2.02 MATERIALS: A. Metals:

1. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 201 or 302/304, hardest workable temper, and No.4 directional polish. Unless otherwise noted or specified, or required by the manufacturer, 201 may be used wherever 302/304 is listed.

2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A526, except ASTM A527 for extensive forming; ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment. a. Where painted finish is indicated, provide mill phosphatized treatment in

lieu of chemical treatment. 3. Steel Sheet: ASTM A569 hot-rolled carbon steel. 4. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A120, welded or seamless,

schedule 40, galvanized. 5. Steel Structural Members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel unless

stainless steel is indicated. a. Galvanized Finish (G.I.): ASTM A123 hot-dipped zinc coating, applied

after fabrication. 6. Aluminum: ASTM B209/B221 sheet, plate and extrusions (as indicated); alloy,

temper and finish as determined by manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40-mil natural anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated.

B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3, Type 2, 0.050" (1.27 mm) thick, except Type 3, 0.042"

(1.07 mm) for post- forming smooth (non-textured). Color and texture as selected by Architect/ Interior Designer. 1. Comply with N.S.F. Standard No. 35. 2. Veneered with approved waterproof and heat proof cement. Rubber base

adhesives are not acceptable. 3. Applied directly over close grained plywood, such as solid Mahogany or solid

Birch, of selected, smooth, sanded stock to ensure a smooth ripple-free laminated surface; or commercial grade furniture particle board, Cortron or equal.

4. Exposed faces and edges are to be faced with 1/16” (1.6 mm) thick material. Corresponding backs are to be covered with approved backing and balancing sheet material.

C. Millwork: No unfinished millwork, plywood/particle board or wood framing (including

backs, undersides, and all surfaces concealed from view) will be permitted. All unfinished surfaces or openings cut through finished surfaces are to be sealed to be water resistant; with excess plastic laminate material, Cortron (Melamine) material, backing materials, sealers, primers, finish paint, etc., to blend with specified finish materials.

D. Hardwood Work Surfaces: Laminated edge grained hard maple (Acer saccharum),

NHLA First Grade with knots, holes and other blemishes culled out, kiln dried at 8 percent or less moisture, waterproof glue, machined, sanded, and finished with N.S.F. approved oil-sealer.


E. Solid Surface Material (SSM): As indicated, provide DuPont Corian 1/2” (12.7 mm) thick 100% homogeneous filled acrylic material meeting ANSI Z124.6 Type 6; or DuPont Zodiaq 3/4” (19 mm) thick quartz material, unless otherwise specified or selected. Colors and patterns as selected by Architect/Interior Designer. The following guidelines and general requirements apply to DuPont SSM, in addition to granite, marble, or any other solid surface materials specified or selected; except fabricator and installer are to be thoroughly experienced and Certified in commercial foodservice installation of granite, marble, or other solid surface material specified or selected. 1. Comply with N.S.F. Standard No. 51. 2. Acrylic adhesive is to be used for all joints. 3. Install directly over 3/4” (19 mm) thick (minimum) substrate of close grained

plywood, such as solid Mahogany or solid Birch, of selected, smooth, sanded stock to ensure a smooth ripple-free surface; or commercial grade furniture particle board, Cortron or equal. Additional bracing and support to be provided as required by the SSM manufacturer.

4. Fabricator to be trained by DuPont factory authorized training personnel and Certified as a Commercial Corian / Zodiaq Fabricator; or equivalent by other SSM manufacturers. If no Commercial Certification program is available from other manufacturer specified or selected, then fabricator is to be Certified as Commercial Corian / Zodiaq Fabricator.

5. Installer to be trained by DuPont factory authorized training personnel and Certified as a Commercial Corian / Zodiaq Installer; or equivalent by other SSM manufacturers. If no Commercial Certification program is available from other manufacturer specified or selected, then installer is to be Certified as Commercial Corian / Zodiaq Installer.

6. All fabrication and installation of Corian / Zodiaq, and all components attached to or installed in or through Corian / Zodiaq is to be in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and the DuPont Corian / Zodiaq Commercial Food Service Installation bulletins. Of particular concern are the sections, details, and instructions on the installation of drop-in or built-in hot or cold components. The DuPont Corian / Zodiaq Food Service Installation bulletins requirements are to also apply to any other SSM, in addition to that manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Contractor to verify and coordinate overhead heat lamps and/or food warmers to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations over solid surface materials, and solid surface materials manufacturer’s recommendations.

8. All surfaces are to be non-porous or cleaned and sealed, in compliance with local health codes; such as with 511 Impregnator by Miracle Sealants for granite.

F. Insulation:

1. For low temperature applications, such as ice bins, cold pans, or fabricated under

counter freezers, use urethane, rigid board foam or foamed-in-place; not less than 2” (50 mm) thick, except that vertical surfaces of cold pans and ice bins may be 1” (25 mm) thick. Insulation to be bonded at joints, to prevent condensation on exterior.

2. For refrigerated applications such as fabricated under counter refrigerators, use urethane rigid board foam or foamed-in-place, or Styrofoam rigid board foam 2” (50 mm) thick, bonded at joints. No fiberglass insulation will be permitted.

3. For heated type applications, such as plate warmers, use block type rock wool, minimum 1” (25 mm) thick; or Marinite I as noted in #4 below.

4. At counters subject to direct or indirect heat from heating or cooking equipment, use 1” (25 mm) thick BNZ Materials, Inc. (303-978-1199) Marinite I, or equal, to insulate between counter and heat source. In addition, provide a 1” (25 mm) minimum air space between the heat source and the insulation.


5. All insulation is to be fully encased or enclosed in 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless

steel. G. Joint Materials:

1. Sealants: water proof and mildew resistant silicone sealant, with Shore A

hardness of 30, except 45 if subject to traffic, and minimum service temperature range of -60º to +400º F. Sealant to be N.S.F. Standard #51 Listed, and FDA and USDA Approved for use in food zones. Surfaces cleaning and sealants installation to comply with applicable requirements of FDA, USDA, and N.S.F. Standards, and accepted foodservice installation practices.

2. Backer Rod: For 3/8” (9.5 mm) or larger joints, to be polyurethane rod stock, larger than joint width.

3. Gaskets: Solid or hollow (but not cellular) neoprene or polyvinyl chloride; light grey, minimum of 40 Shore A hardness, self-adhesive or prepared for either adhesive application or mechanical anchorage.

H. Paint And Coatings:

1. Provide the types of painting and coating materials which, after drying or curing,

are suitable for use in conjunction with foodservice, and which are durable, non-toxic, non-dusting, non-flaking, mildew resistant, and comply with N.S.F. Standards and governing regulations for foodservice.

2. Galvanize Repair Paint: MIL-P-21035. 3. Sound Deadener: N.S.F. listed sound deadening material such as latex sound

deadener, for internal surfaces of metal work, and underside of metal counters and tables between work top and underbracing. Verify sound deadening requirements or restrictions with local health authorities.

4. Pretreatment: SSPC-PT2 or PT3, of FS TT-C490. 5. Primer Coating for Metal: FS TT-P-86, type suitable for baking, where indicated. 6. Enamel for Metal: Synthetic type, FA TT-P-491, type suitable for baking, where

indicated.

2.03 FABRICATED PRODUCTS: A. Hardware (also refer to article 2.4 Fabrication Of Metal Work in general, and paragraphs

O. Doors 1-3 and P. Drawer Assemblies 1-6 specifically, for additional requirements): 1. General: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than ANSI 156.9 Type 2

(Institutional), satin finish stainless steel or dull chrome finish on brass, bronze, or steel.

2. Hinged Door Hardware: Stainless steel hinged doors to be mounted with heavy duty N.S.F. approved hinges with Component Hardware Group, Model No. P62-1010 pulls, or equal; or full length pulls as per individual itemized specifications and shown on Standard Detail FSD1-24. Catches to be heavy-duty magnetic type, except as otherwise indicated. Millwork cabinet hinged doors to be mounted with Blum 95º CLIP top thick door all metal hinges, nickel plated, with 3 dimensional adjustment, or equal; or as per individual itemized specifications.

3. Drawer Hardware: Slides to be 200 pounds (90 kilograms) minimum capacity per pair, 201 or 300 series stainless steel, full extension, side-mounting, self-closing type, with stainless steel ball-bearings, and positive stops; Component Hardware Group Series S52, or equal. Pulls to be Component Hardware Group, Model No. P62-1012, or equal; or full length pulls as per individual itemized specifications and shown on Standard Detail FSD1-24.


4. Sliding Door Hardware: Sliding doors to be mounted on large, quiet ball bearing

rollers in 14 gauge (2 mm) stainless steel overhead tracks, and be removable without the use of tools. Bottom of cabinet to have stainless steel guide-pins and not channel tracks for doors.

5. All hardware to be identified with manufacturer's name and number, so that broken or worn parts may be replaced.

B. Casters:

1. Type and size as recommended by caster manufacturer, N.S.F. approved for the type and weight of equipment supported; normally 5” (127 mm) diameter heavy-duty, ball-bearing, solid or disc wheel with non-marking grease proof rubber, neoprene or polyurethane tire; unless otherwise specified. Minimum width of tread to be 1-3/16” (30 mm). Minimum capacity per caster to be 250 pound (113.4kg), unless otherwise noted in itemized specifications.

2. Solid material wheels to be provided with stainless steel rotating wheel guard. 3. To be sanitary, have sealed wheel and swivel bearings and polished plated finish

per N.S.F. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, equip each item with two (2) swivel-type casters and

two (2) fixed casters, with foot brakes on two (2) casters. 5. Unless item is equipped with another form of all-around protective bumper,

provide circular rotating bumper above each caster, 5” (127 mm) diameter tire of light grey synthetic rubber (hollow or closed-cell) on cadmium-plated disc.

C. Plumbing Fittings, Trim And Accessories:

1. General: Where exposed or semi-exposed, provide bright chrome plated brass

or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed. 2. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with foodservice equipment as listed in the itemized

specifications. 3. Water Outlets: At sinks and at other locations where water is supplied (by

manual, automatic or remote control), furnish commercial quality faucets, valves, dispensers or fill devices, of the type and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated.

4. Waste Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, furnish 2” (50 mm) remote-lever ball valve type waste valve, and 3-1/2” (89 mm) flat strainer.

5. Also refer to article 2.4.K for additional information. D. Electrical Materials:

1. General: Provide standard materials, devices and components as recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator, selected and installed in accordance with N.E.M.A. standards and recommendations; and as required for safe and efficient use and operation of the foodservice equipment, without sanitation problems.

2. Components to bear the U.L. label or be approved by the prevailing authority. 3. Custom fabricated refrigerated/freezer units to be provided with vapor tight light

receptacles, shatterproof lamps and automatic switches. Wiring to be concealed. 4. Where light fixtures are specified or detailed as part of counters, cases or

fixtures; light fixtures with lamps to be furnished and installed. Warm white lamps to be provided, unless otherwise specified. If fluorescent light fixtures are specified, ballasts and tubes to be provided. Shields to be provided for all light fixtures.


5. Convenience and Power Outlets: Make cutouts and install appropriate boxes or outlets in fabricated fixtures, complete with wiring, conduit, outlet and stainless steel cover plate. Outlets and plugs to conform to N.E.M.A. standards. Electrical outlets and devices to be first quality "Specification Grade". GFCI outlets to be furnished where adjacent to sink compartments, as per the National Electrical Code.

6. Plugs and Cords: Where cords and plugs are provided, they are to comply with National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (N.E.M.A.) requirements. Indicate N.E.M.A. configuration for each applicable item.

7. Power Characteristics: Refer to Electrical Divisions specifications for project power characteristics. Also, refer to individual equipment requirements, for loads and ratings.

8. All electrical components (J-boxes, conduit, outlets, switches, cover plates, light fixtures, panels, etc.) built into or on any equipment provided by the KEC, other than standard buy-out factory manufactured equipment, is to be vapor or water tight type. Provide buy-out equipment with vapor or water tight electrical components wherever available.

2.04 FABRICATION OF METALWORK:

A. General Fabrication Requirements:

1. Remove burrs from sheared edges of metalwork, ease the corners and smooth to

eliminate cutting hazard. Bend sheets of metal, at not less than the minimum radius required to avoid grain separation in the metal. Maintain flat, smooth surfaces, without damage to finish.

2. Reinforce metal at locations of hardware, anchorages and accessory attachments wherever metal is less than 14 gauge (2 mm), or requires mortised application. Conceal reinforcements to the greatest extent possible. Weld in place, on concealed faces.

3. Exposed screws or bolt heads, rivets and butt joints made by riveting straps under seams and then filled with solder, will not be accepted. Where fasteners are permitted, provide Phillips head, flat or oval head machine screws. Cap threads with acorn nuts, unless fully concealed in inaccessible construction; and provide nuts and lockwashers unless metal for tapping is at least 12 gauge (2.5 mm). Match fastener head finish with finish of metal fastened.

4. Where components of fabricated metal work are indicated to be galvanized, and involve welding or machining of metal heavier than 16 gauge (1.6 mm), complete the fabrication and provide hot-dip galvanizing of each component, after fabrication, to the greatest extent possible (depending upon available dip-tank sizes). Comply with ASTM A123.

5. Welding And Soldering: a. Materials 18 gauge (1.3 mm), or heavier, to be welded. b. Seams and joints to be shop welded or soldered as the nature of the

material may require. c. Welds to be ground smooth and polished to match original finish. d. Where galvanizing has been burned off, the weld is to be cleaned and

touched up with high grade aluminum paint. 6. Provide removable panels for access to mechanical and electrical service

connections, which are concealed behind or within foodservice equipment, but only where access is not possible and not indicated through other work.

7. Where ends of fixtures, splashbacks, shelves, etc., are open, fill by forming the metal, or welding sections, if necessary, to close entire opening flush to walls or adjoining fixtures.


8. Rolled edges are to be as detailed, with corners bullnosed, ground and polished. 9. Equipment to have 1/2” (12.7 mm) or larger radius coves in horizontal and vertical

corners, and intersections, per N.S.F. standards. B. Metal And Gauges:

1. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate exposed metalwork of stainless steel; and fabricate the following components from the gauge of metal indicated, and other components from not less than 20 gauge (1 mm) metal: a. Table and counter tops: 14 gauge (2 mm) b. Sinks and drainboards: 14 gauge (2 mm) c. Shelves: 16 gauge (1.6 mm) d. Front drawer and door panels: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) (double-pan type) e. Single pan doors and drawer fronts: 16 gauge (1.6 mm) f. Enclosed base cabinets: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) g. Enclosed wall cabinets: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) h. Exhaust hoods and ventilators: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) i. Pan-type insets and trays: 16 gauge (1.6 mm) j. Removable covers and panels: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) k. Skirts and enclosure panels: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) l. Closure and trim strips over 4" (102 mm) wide: 18 gauge (1.3 mm) m. Hardware reinforcement: 12 gauge (2.5 mm) n. Gusset plates: 10 gauge (3.4 mm)

C. Work-Surface Fabrication:

1. Fabricate metal work surfaces by forming and welding, to provide seamless construction; using welding rods matching sheet metal, grinding and polishing. Where necessary for disassembly, provide waterproof gasketed draw-type joints with concealed bolting.

2. Reinforce work surfaces 30” (762 mm) on center both ways, with galvanized or stainless steel concealed structural members. Reinforce edges, which are not self-reinforced, by formed edges.

D. Metal Top Construction:

1. Metal tops to be one-piece welded construction, including field joints. Secure to a full perimeter galvanized steel channel frame cross-braced not farther than 30" (762 mm) on center. Fasten top with stud bolts or tack welds. If hat sections are used in lieu of channels, close ends.

2. Properly designed draw fastening, trim strip, or commercial joint material to suit requirement is to be used, only if specified.

E. Structural Framing:

1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide framing of minimum 1” (25 mm) pipe-size round pipe or tube members, with mitered and welded joints and gusset plates, ground smooth. Provide 14 gauge (2 mm) stainless steel tube for exposed framing, and galvanized steel pipe for concealed framing.

2. Where indicated, flange rear and end edges up to form splashes integrally with top, with vertical and horizontal corners coved of not less than 1/4” (6 mm) radius, die formed. Turn back splashes 1” (25 mm) to wall across top and ends with rounded edge on break, unless otherwise specified.


3. For die-crimped edges, use inverted "V" 1/2” (13 mm) deep inside and 2” (50 mm) deep on outside, unless otherwise shown. For straight down flanges, make 1-3/4” (45 mm) deep on outside. For bullnose edges, roll down 1-3/4” (45 mm).

4. Edges: die-formed, integral with top. For rounded corners, form to 1” (25 mm) radius, weld, and polish to original finish.

F. Field Joints: For any field joint required because of size of fixture; butt-joint, reinforce on

underside with angles of same material, bolt together with non-corrosive bolts and nuts, field weld, grind and polish.

G. Pipe Bases: Construct pipe bases of 1-5/8” (41 mm) diameter 18 gauge (1.3 mm)

stainless steel tubing. Fit legs with polished stainless steel sanitary adjustable bullet feet to provide for adjustment of approximately 1-1/2” (37 mm), without exposing threads. Space legs to provide ample support for tops, precluding any possibility of buckling or sagging, and in no case more than 6'-0" (1829 mm) centers.

H. Legs And Crossrails

1. Equipment legs and crossrails to be 1-5/8” (41 mm), 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel tubing.

2. Welds at cross rails to be continuous and ground smooth. Tack welds will not be acceptable.

3. Bottom of legs to be swedged inward and fitted with a stainless steel bullet-type foot with not less than 2” (50 mm) adjustment.

4. Free standing legs to be pegged to floor with 1/4” (6 mm) stainless steel rod, or provided with bolt down type flanged feet anchored to the floor; depending on expected severity of use and/or abuse.

5. Components: a. Stainless Steel Gusset: Stainless steel exterior to fit 1-5/8” (41 mm)

tubing, with Allen screw for fastening and adjustment. Not less than 3” (76 mm) diameter at top and 3-3/4” (95mm) long. Outer shell 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel, reinforced with 12 gauge (2.5 mm) mild steel insert welded interior shell, or approved equal.

b. Stainless Steel Low Counter Legs: Stainless steel exterior 5-3/4” (146 mm) minimum, 7” (178 mm) maximum length with stainless steel 3-1/2” (89 mm) square plate with four counter-sunk holes, welded to top for fastening.

c. Stainless Steel Adjustable Foot: Stainless steel 1-1/2” (37 mm) diameter tapered at bottom to 1” (25 mm) diameter, fitted with threaded cold rolled rod for minimum 1-1/2” (37 mm) diameter x 3/4” (19 mm) threaded bushing plug welded to legs, or approved equal. Push-in foot not acceptable.

6. Legs to be fastened to equipment with gussets, as follows: a. Sinks: Reinforced with bushings and set screw. b. Metal Top Tables and Dish Tables: Welded to galvanized steel

channels, 14 gauge (2 mm) or heavier, anchored to top with screws through slotted holes.

c. Wood Top Tables: Welded to stainless steel channels, 14 gauge (2 mm) or heavier, anchored to top with screws through slotted holes.

I. Shelves:

1. Construct solid shelves under pipe base tables of 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel, with 1-1/2” (37 mm) turned down and under edges on exposed sides, and 2” (50 mm) turn up against walls or equipment. Fully weld to pipe legs.


2. In fixtures with enclosed bases, turn up shelves on back and sides with 1/4” (6 mm) (minimum) radius and feather slightly to ensure a tight fit to enclosure panels.

J. Sinks:

1. Construct sinks of 14 gauge (2 mm) stainless steel with No.4 finish inside and outside. 2. Form back, bottom and front of one piece, with ends and partitions welded into

place. Partitions: double thickness, 2” (51 mm) minimum space between walls. Multiple compartments to be continuous on the exterior, without applied facing strips or panels.

3. Cove interior vertical and horizontal corners of each tub not less than 1/4” (6 mm) radius, die formed. Outer ends of drainboards to have roll rim risers not less than 3” (76 mm) high.

4. Drill faucet holes in splashes 2-1/2” (63.5 mm) below top edge. Verify center spacing with faucet specified.

5. Sink insets to be deep drawn of 16 gauge (1.6 mm), or heavier, polished stainless steel. Weld into sink drainboards with 1-1/2” (37 mm) x 1-1/2” (37 mm) x 14 gauge (2 mm) stainless steel angle brackets; securely welded to sinks and galvanized cross angles spot welded to underside of drainboards to form an integral part of the installation.

6. The bottom of each compartment is to be creased such as to ensure complete drainage to waste opening. Slope bottom of sink bowls toward outlet.

K. Drains And Wastes and Faucets:

1. Furnish and install Fisher model 28940, or equal, ball valve type rotary drain assembly with flat strainer and connected overflow assembly, with chrome finish, in die-drawn inset type sinks and bain marie sinks.

2. Other custom fabricated sinks to be furnished with Fisher model 28932, or equal, ball value type rotary drain assembly, with flat strainer and chrome finish. Waste connection to have 2” (50 mm) external thread size, with 1-1/2” (37 mm) internal thread size.

3. Rotary Handle: Of sufficient length to extend to front edge of sink. No riveting, screws or soldering permitted to fit drains to sinks, with all parts of drains easily removable for servicing and replacement.

4. All faucets furnished with equipment included in this Section to be lead free and comply with N.S.F. Standard #61, Section #9; such as manufactured by Fisher, Chicago, or T&S.

5. Faucets and pre-rinse spray assemblies furnished with equipment included in this Section, are to have a maximum GPM flow rate in compliance with the Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct) and later updates; or local requirements, whichever is lower. EPAct / local requirements are to be applicable to all faucets and pre- rinses; except for pre-rinse type assemblies used at glass icing / fill stations, fill hose / faucet assemblies at high water usage cooking equipment such as kettles, tilt fry pans, etc., and fill faucets at high volume / usage sinks such as pot and prep sinks, etc. are to have flow rates of approximately 5 gpm flow minimum.

6. All flex hose type faucet assemblies, such as pre-rinses, kettle fill hoses, etc., to have an inline pressure type back flow preventer in the hose assembly, as required by local codes.

7. All equipment provided by this Contractor, which discharges liquid waste exceeding 140º F (60º C), is to be provided with a cold water drain tempering assembly per local codes.


L. Workmanship: 1. Best quality in the trade. Field verify dimensions before fabricating; conform all

items to dimensions of building; neatly fit around pipes, offsets and other obstructions.

2. Fabricate only in accordance with approved shop drawings, showing pipes, obstructions to be built around, and location of utilities and services.

M. Casework:

1. Enclosure: except as otherwise indicated, provide each unit of casework (base, wall, overhead and free-standing) with a complete-enclosure metal cabinet, including fronts, backs, tops, bottoms, and sides.

2. Bases to be made of 18 gauge (1.3 mm) stainless steel sheets reinforced by forming the metal.

3. Ends, partitions and shelves to be stainless steel. 4. Unexposed backs and structural members may be galvanized, unless otherwise

noted. 5. Vertical ends and partitions to be single wall, with a 2” (50 mm) face. 6. Sides and through partitions are flush with bottom rail, welded at intersections. 7. Shelves: Provide adjustable standards for positioning and support of shelves in

casework; except bottom shelf of cabinet mounted on legs or as specified. Turn back of shelf units up 2” (50 mm) and hem. Turn other edges down to form open channel. Reinforce shelf units to support 40 pounds per square foot (195 kgs/sq meter) loading, plus 100 percent impact loading.

8. Bottom front rail of bases set on masonry platform to be continuously closed and sealed to platform.

N. Doors:

1. Metal doors to be double-cased stainless steel. Outer pans to be 18 gauge (1.3

mm) stainless steel with corners welded, ground smooth and polished. Inner pan to be 20 gauge (1 mm) stainless steel fitted tightly into outer pan with a sound deadening material such as Celotex or Styrofoam used as a core. The two pans to be tack welded together and joints solder filled. Doors to finish approximately 3/4” (19 mm) thick, and be fitted with flush recessed type stainless steel door pulls; or full length pulls as per individual itemized specifications and shown on Standard Detail FSD1-24.

2. Wood doors to be fabricated as detailed. 3. Hinged doors to be mounted on heavy-duty N.S.F. approved hinges, or as noted

on plans or specifications. O. Drawer Assemblies:

1. Assemblies to consist of removable drawer body mounted in a ball bearing slide assembly with fully enclosed housing.

2. Slide assembly consists of one pair of 200 pound (90 kilograms) capacity stainless steel roller bearing full extension slides, with side and back enclosure panels, front spacer angle, two drawer carrier angles, secured to slides and stainless steel front.

3. Drawers intended for tools and general non-food products storage are to have 20” x 20” x 6” deep (508 mm x 508 mm x 152 mm), 18 gauge (1.3 mm) minimum stainless steel drawer pans.

4. Drawers intended to hold food products are to have 12” x 20” x 6” deep (305 mm x 508 mm x 152 mm) stainless steel food pans.


5. All drawer pans to be easily removable without tools or disassembly of any drawer assembly components.

6. Drawer fronts are double cased, 3/4” (19 mm) thick, with 18 gauge (1.3 mm) stainless steel welded and polished front pan. Steel back pan is tightly fitted and tack welded. Sound deaden with rigid insulation material.

7. Provide drawers with replaceable soft neoprene bumpers or for refrigerated drawers, a full perimeter replaceable refrigerator gasket.

P. Closed Base: Where casework is indicated to be located on a raised-floor base, prepare

casework for support without legs, and for anchorage and sealant application, as required for a completely enclosed and concealed base.

Q. Support from Floor: Equip floor supported mobile units with casters, and equip items

indicated as roll-out units, with manufacturer's standard one-directional rollers. Otherwise, and except for closed-base units, provide pipe or tube legs, with adjustable bullet-design feet for floor supported items of fabricated metalwork. Provide 1-1/2” (37 mm) adjustment of feet (concealed threading).

R. Shop Painting:

1. Clean and prepare metal surfaces to be painted; remove rust and dirt. Apply

treatment to zinc coated surfaces, which have not been mill phosphatized. Coat welded and abraded areas of zinc coated surfaces, with galvanize repair paint.

2. Apply 1.5 mil (dry film thickness) metal primer coating, followed by 2, 1.0 mil (dry film thickness) metal enamel finish coatings.

3. Bake primer and finish coatings in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions for a baked enamel finish.

S. Sound Deadening:

1. Sound deaden underside of metal tops, drainboards, undershelves, cabinet interior shelves, etc., above the underbracing/reinforcing/framing only.

2.05 FILTER EXHAUST HOODS AND/OR WATER WASH VENTILATOR FABRICATION:

A. 18 Gauge (1.3 mm) type 201 or 304 stainless steel external welded construction, in

accordance with the latest edition of N.F.P.A. No.96 and International Mechanical Code, including all applicable appendices. Exposed welds to be ground and polished. Exhaust hoods to be U.L. Listed as available for length specified.

B. Furnish type of fixture specified. Fixtures to be U.L. listed for cooking equipment exhaust hoods, N.S.F. approved, and with sealed safety lenses.

C. Furnish welded stainless steel formed duct collars at ceiling or wall duct connections.

Verify size and location of duct connections required in this contract, before fabrication. D. Pre-piped liquid chemical or water fire suppressant system, as specified; complying with

applicable local and N.F.P.A. regulations. Wet chemical fire suppression systems to comply with UL 300 Standards. Water fire suppression systems to comply with U.L. Category Subject 199E. Each pull station is to be clearly identified with a permanent type label, as to which exhaust hood(s) it is for. Each exhaust hood is to have a matching permanent type label, identifying which pull station activates it’s fire system.

E. All cooking equipment below exhaust hoods/ventilators, on casters, are to be provided

with positive wheel placement systems for the rear casters, similar to Posi-Set units, in compliance with NFPA-17A 5.6.4 and NFPA-96 12.1.2.3.


F. Water wash or ultra-violet control panel to be by the same manufacture as the ventilator, with time clock control for automatic operation. Provide stainless steel trim strips for recessed control cabinet applications. Provide stainless steel chase for surface mounted control panel, from top of panel to ceiling, full width and depth of panel.

2.06 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT:

A. General:

1. Furnish either single or multiple compressor units, as specified or recommended by the manufacturer for the sizes and variations between connected evaporator loads as indicated.

2. Furnish units of the capacities indicated, arranged to respond to multiple- evaporator thermostats and defrosting timers. Include coils, receivers, compressors, motors, motor starters, mounting bases, vibration isolation units, fans, dryers, valves, piping, insulation, gauges, winter control equipment and complete automatic control system.

3. Refrigerant: Precharge units with type or types recommended by manufacturer for services indicated, with quick-disconnect type connections only where specified, ready to receive refrigerant piping runs to evaporators and (where remote) to condensers. All refrigerant and associated components to comply with the requirements of the Montreal Protocol Agreement. No CFC or HCFC refrigerants or associated components will be permitted on this Project. HFC refrigerants and components are to be used. Contractor is responsible for coordinating these requirements with manufacturers.

4. Foodservice equipment items included in this Section, with remote refrigerated systems, are to include interconnecting refrigeration lines, sizing, and insulation between components, as per manufacturer’s installation instructions, and as determined by this Contractor’s Certified Refrigeration Sub-Contractor; and only after a thorough examination of actual site conditions and obstacles which might affect the routing. Routing should be as direct and short as possible and practical. Refer to additional requirements listed in this Section 11 40 00, 1.5 Laws, Ordinances And Standards.

5. The minimum outdoor operating ambient temperature for design of units is -10 degrees Fahrenheit (-23 Centigrade), or lower as applicable for extreme low local conditions. The maximum indoor design temperature for operation of compressor units is 95 degrees Fahrenheit (35 Centigrade). The maximum outdoor ambient design temperature is to be determined by Contractor with prevailing conditions at mounting location of compressor, such as sun exposure, limited ventilation, high fences/walls, roof color and materials, local climatic extremes, etc.; but in no case is it to be less than 100 degrees Fahrenheit (37.8 Centigrade).

6. All refrigeration systems with remote condensing units and job-site installed interconnecting refrigeration lines shall be tested to verify that there are no leaks. Leak testing shall be equal to or better than a professionally recognized 48 hour minimum, pressure holding test. If any leaks are detected, they shall be repaired and another leak test preformed; until there are zero leaks detected. A written report of the type test preformed and a step-by-step record of the procedure and readings shall be submitted to the KEC for inclusion in the Operations and Maintenance Data Manuals.

B. Components:

1. Coils for fabricated refrigerators to have vinyl plastic coatings, stainless steel housings; and be installed in such a manner as to be replaceable.

2. Provide guards for all refrigeration/freezer fans, with maximum 1/2” mesh.


3. Remote refrigeration system to be complete with thermostatic expansion valves at the evaporator.

4. Fabricated refrigerated compartments to be fitted with flush dial thermometers, with chrome plated bezels. Thermometers to be adjustable, and shall be calibrated after installation. Thermometers to have an accuracy of + 2 degrees Fahrenheit (1 degree Centigrade).

5. Hardware: a. Refrigerator hardware for fabricated refrigerator compartments to be

heavy-duty components. b. Self closing hinges. c. Latches to be magnetic edge mount type, unless specified or detailed

otherwise. 6. Doors and drawers for walk-in coolers/freezers, and reach-in refrigerated

compartments, both fabricated and standard, to be fitted with cylinder locking type latches, and provided with master keys.

C. Cold Pans: Ice pans, refrigerated pans and cabinets to be provided with breaker strips,

where adjoining top or cabinet face materials, to prevent transfer of cold. D. All mechanically cooled custom fabricated or standard buy-out refrigerators with openings

in the top for cooling pans, and/or all built-in or drop-in mechanically cooled cold pans are to comply with, and be listed by N.S.F. Standard #7. Contractor is to verify that the specified unit complies with this requirement.

E. Ventilation Of Refrigerated Equipment:

1. Adequate ventilation to be provided for custom fabricated equipment with integral

refrigeration condensing units, both built-in and drop-in. If flow through ventilation cannot be provided, provide flow direction partitions and an additional fan capable of cooling the condensing unit.

2. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, additional room ventilation is required to ensure correct operating temperatures of standard buy-out, custom fabricated, or remote refrigeration condensing units, or compressor rack assemblies, they are to so state in a letter to the Architect, for evaluation and decision.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:

A. Nameplates: Whenever possible, locate nameplates and labels on manufactured items,

in accessible position, but not within customer's normal view. Do not apply name plates or labels on custom fabricated work, except as required for compliance with governing regulations, insurance requirements, or operator performance.

B. Manufactured Equipment Items: Furnish items as scheduled or herein specified. Verify

dimensions, spaces, rough-in and service requirements, and electrical characteristics, before ordering. Provide trim, accessories and miscellaneous items for complete installation.


C. Insert Pans: 1. General: Cut-outs, openings, drawers, or equipment specified or detailed to hold

stainless steel insert pans to be provided with a full complement of pans as follows: a. One (1) stainless steel, 20 gauge (1 mm) minimum, solid insert pan for

each space, sized per plans, details, or specifications. b. Where pan sizes are not indicated in plans, details, or specifications,

provide one full-size pan for each opening. c. Provide maximum depth pan to suit application and space.

2. Provide 18 gauge (1.3 mm) removable stainless steel adapter bars where applicable.

3. All cut-outs and openings, or equipment specified or detailed to hold stainless steel insert pans, shall be provided with a hinged stainless steel removable night cover.

D. Tray Slides: Before fabrication of counters with tray slides, verify:

1. Size and shape of tray with Owner/Operator. Edge of tray should not overhang

outer support/slider by more than 2" (50 mm). If edge of tray exceeds this dimension, notify Architect, in writing, for evaluation and adjustment, if necessary.

2. Configuration of corners, turns, and shape of tray slides for proper support and safe guidance of trays.

3. Tray slide to be capable of supporting 200 pounds per linear foot (298 kgs/meter), live load.

E. Self-leveling dispensers: Verify type, make, dimensions and weight of ware with

Owner/Operator; and submit to the dispenser manufacturer, for proper sizing and calibration of dispensers.

F. Carbon dioxide (CO2) equipment: Where equipment requires connection with

compressed CO2 cylinder for operation, provide 2-cylinder manifold and control system (integral with equipment) with proper connectors for Department of Transportation (DOT) approved type cylinders, complete with cylinder safety devices and supports. Applicable to projects with CO2 equipment included in Contractor’s specified equipment.

G. Reasonable quietness of operation of equipment is a requirement, and Contractor will be

required to replace or repair any equipment producing out-of-the-ordinary intolerable noise. This also includes providing and installing bumpers and gaskets for doors and drawers on fabricated and standard manufactured items, and sound insulation where feasible.

H. Gas pressure regulator: All gas fired equipment included with this Section is to be

provided with a gas pressure regulating valve with a built-in vent limiting device. Contractor is responsible for coordinating this requirement with their manufacturers and suppliers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SUPERVISION:

A. A competent supervisor, representing the Contractor, is to be present at all times during

progress of the Contractor's work.


B. Contractor is responsible for coordinating all general and specific requirements included in Parts 1, 2, and 3 of this Section 11 40 00 general conditions, with their manufacturers, fabricators, and suppliers.

3.02 SITE EXAMINATION:

A. Verify site conditions under the provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions and applicable provisions of Division 1 Sections. Notify the Architect, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions for proper installation of foodservice equipment.

B. Verify wall, column, door, window, and ceiling locations and dimensions. Fabrication and

installation should not proceed until dimensions and conditions have been verified and coordinated with fabrication details.

C. Verify that wall reinforcement or backing has been provided, and is correct for wall

supported equipment. Coordinate placement dimensions with wall construction Section. D. Verify that ventilation ducts are of the correct characteristics, and in the required

locations. E. Verify that utilities are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the required

locations.

3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Sequence installation and erection to ensure correct mechanical and electrical utility

connections are achieved. B. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, leveled and

adjusted to correct height. Anchor to supporting substrate where indicated, and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. Adjust counter tops and other work surfaces to a level tolerance of 1/16” (1.6 mm) (maximum offset, and plus or minus on dimension, and maximum variation in 24" (610 mm) run from level or indicated slope). Provide anchors, supports, bracing, clips, attachments, etc., as required to comply with the local seismic restraint requirements. The Guidelines For Seismic Restraint Of Kitchen Equipment, as prepared for the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles and endorsed by S.M.A.C.N.A., is to be followed.

D. Complete field assembly joints in the work (joints which cannot be completed in the shop)

by welding, bolting-and-gasketing, or similar methods as indicated and specified. Grind welds smooth and restore finish. Set or trim flush, except for "T" gaskets as indicated.

E. Provide closure plates and strips where required, with joints coordinated with units of

equipment. F. Provide sealants and gaskets all around each unit to make joints airtight, waterproof,

vermin-proof, and sanitary for cleaning purposes. G. Joints up to 3/8” (9.5 mm) wide, to be stuffed with backer rod, to shape sealant bead

properly, at 1/4” (6 mm) depth.


H. At internal corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove, of not less than 3/8” (9.5 mm) radius.

I. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave, with edges flush with faces of

materials at joint. J. Provide sealant filled or gasketed joints up to 3/8” (9.5 mm) joint width. Wider than 3/8”

(9.5 mm), provide matching metal closure strips, with sealant application each side of strips. Anchor gaskets mechanically, or with adhesives to prevent displacement.

K. Treat enclosed spaces, inaccessible after equipment installation, by covering horizontal

surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4 ounces per square foot (1.2 kg/m2). L. Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals. M. Cut and drill components for service outlets, fixtures, piping, conduit, and fittings. N. Verify and coordinate the mounting heights of all wall shelves and equipment, with

equipment located below them, for proper clearances. O. Coordinate with the Plumbing and Electrical Divisions, and provide holes in food service

equipment for plumbing and electrical service to and through the fixtures, as required. This includes welded sleeves, collars, ferrules, or escutcheons. These services are to be located so that they do not interfere with intended use and/or servicing of the fixture.

P. All equipment provided by this Section, which requires light bulb(s), are to be provided

with heavy-duty, energy efficient, extra long life bulbs with a minimum life expectancy of 5000 hours, and as required by the local Jurisdictions. All light bulbs in and/or above foodservice equipment and/or areas are to be coated or provided with shields in compliance with local health codes.

Q. All equipment provided by this Section, shall include any and all parts, components,

options, accessories, etc. necessary to provide a completely functional item for its intended use under normal conditions; and if appropriate, after the final utility connections are completed by other Divisions. This shall generally apply to equipment such as soda systems, beer systems, remote refrigeration systems, any type remote system or equipment, or ice machines; but shall also apply to any equipment provided by this Section.

3.04 ADJUSTING:

A. Test and adjust equipment, controls and safety devices to ensure proper working order

and conditions. B. Repair or replace equipment which is found to be defective in its operation, including units

which are below capacity or operating with excessive noise or vibration.

3.05 CLEANING AND RESTORING FINISHES: A. After completion of installation, and completion of other major work in foodservice areas,

remove protective coverings and clean foodservice equipment, internally and externally. B. Restore exposed and semi-exposed finishes, to remove abrasions and other damages;

polish exposed metal surfaces and touch-up painted surfaces. Replace work, which cannot be successfully restored.


C. Polish glass, plastic, hardware and accessories, fixtures and fittings. D. Wash and clean equipment, and leave in a condition ready for the Owner to sanitize and

use.

3.06 TESTING, START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS: A. Delay the start-up of equipment until service lines have been tested, balanced, and

adjusted for pressure, voltage and similar considerations; and until water and steam lines have been cleaned and treated for sanitation.

B. Make arrangements for demonstration of foodservice equipment operation and

maintenance, in advance with the Owner/Operator. C. Demonstrate foodservice equipment, to familiarize the Owner and the Operator on

operation and maintenance procedures, including periodic preventative maintenance measures required. Include an explanation of service requirements and simple on-site service procedures, as well as, information concerning the name, address and telephone number of qualified local source of service. The individual(s) performing the demonstration are to be knowledgeable of operating and service aspects of the equipment.

D. Provide a written report of the demonstration, to the Owner, outlining the equipment

demonstrated and malfunctions or deficiencies noted. Indicate individuals present at demonstration.

E. Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, clean the foodservice equipment, and leave in

a condition ready for the Owner to sanitize and use. F. All keys for all locks provided with equipment provided under this Section, are to be

gathered up, individually tagged with the equipment they belong to, put into a single box, and handed over to the Owner’s authorized representative. A list of the keys and their associated equipment Item numbers is to be provided with the O&M Manuals, along with a copy of the list, signed by the Owner’s representative, acknowledging receipt of the keys.

3.07 CLEAR AWAY

A. Throughout the progress of their work, Contractor is to keep the working area free from

debris, and remove rubbish from premises resulting from work being done by them. At the completion of their work, Contractor is to leave the premises in a clean and finished condition.

3.08 REUSED EXISTING EQUIPMENT:

A. Contractor is responsible for identifying, tagging and/or removing all existing equipment,

which will be reused. Verify and coordinate specific equipment with these plans and specifications, and the Owner. This includes items existing, and the associated work necessary, at the time of the signing of the Contract for the Foodservice Equipment section; and does not include any items added, changed, or damaged (by other than the Contractor) after the signing; except to the extent of work which would have been included with the original existing items.


B. Remove from existing locations, clean and renovate as noted below, store and re-install existing equipment to be reused, in the new locations as shown on plans; ready for utility connections, as appropriate. Existing equipment to be reused, with utility connections, to be removed after disconnection as noted in paragraph J, below.

C. Do work in cooperation with Owner, so that normal functioning of services is minimally

interrupted. Coordinate all removal and replacement scheduling with the Construction Scheduling Manager (or similar responsible party), to insure adequate time to complete the necessary work. If adequate time to properly relocate and reset the existing items, and complete all cleaning and repair will not be available, due to continuing use of the existing items, or the allotted construction time; contact the Owner and obtain a written agreement as to what work is to be deleted or delayed; such as cleaning, repainting, or repairs.

D. All surface dirt, grease, oil, food residues, ingredients, extraneous matter and other soiling

materials is to be removed in order to obtain minimum acceptable sanitation and food service standards. Thorough final rinsing of all cleaning agents to be at a minimum temperature of 180 degrees Fahrenheit (82.2 Centigrade) where possible without damage to equipment or controls. Otherwise, use USDA approved cleaning agents and/or cleaning agents, which are acceptable for use with commercial food service equipment. This includes all exterior surfaces of the existing equipment to be reused, and interior work surfaces such as inside oven compartments, fryer vats, warewashers, etc.

E. All painted items with major paint blemishes to be sanded, primed, and repainted to

match the original color and type paint. Primer and paint to be of a type approved for use with commercial food service equipment. All controls, lights, view windows, non-painted parts, etc. to be protected as recommended by the Manufacturer. Minor paint blemishes can be touched-up in a professional manner. This work is to be included in the Bid Submittal, as a separate line cost, at the end of the Bid Submittal.

F. Replace and/or repair minor broken parts to produce a cleanable and functional item.

Repairs and/or parts are for minor required items such as control knobs, handles, pilot lamps, belts, oil changes, minor adjustments and recalibrations, etc. This does not include addition or replacement of any wearing components such as cutters, blades, etc.; or any accessory components such as mixer beaters, hooks, whips, etc., except for presently existing accessory components which are broken and non-functional, or as noted in the itemized specifications.

G. Where required by local code authorities, provide additional parts and/or modifications to

comply with code requirements in place at the time of this project. H. Where required, remove reused existing equipment from the premises for repairs,

alterations and cleaning. I. Refer to schedule on the Foodservice Drawings and to the Itemized Specifications at the

end of this section, for reused existing equipment. J. Disconnection of existing equipment to be relocated and/or reused and disconnection and

removal/disposal of existing equipment, which will not be reused, is work as designated by the Architect, and not included in this Section. (See page 11 40 00-1, 1.2.E.)


K. Cost estimates for any repairs and/or parts more than the minor items stated above, or repairs requiring significant disassembling of the item, should be submitted to the Owner, for consideration and approval as an addition to the Contract. In general, this would be considered as any repairs and/or parts amounting to an estimate up to 10% of the cost of a comparable new item. Any item, which would require repairs and/or parts amounting to an estimate up to 25% or more, should include an alternate cost for supplying a comparable new item as a consideration by the Owner, and addition to the Contract. Estimates are for each individual reused existing item only, which requires repairs and/or parts, and only to the extent that work is actually required; and should not be considered as a lump sum estimate on all reused existing items combined, or as an allowance for adding accessories or options.

3.09 STANDARD DETAILS:

A. Refer to the individual Standard Details included in the Foodservice Equipment contract

documents, for general fabrication information; as referenced in the custom fabricated Itemized Specifications.

3.10 ITEMIZED SPECIFICATIONS:

A. Refer to the following pages for specific specification information on each item included in

this Section. (Remainder of page left blank intentionally.)


ITEM 1: WALK-IN GRAB-N-GO COOLER WITH DISPLAY DOORS-RECESSED 4" Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Bally Refrigerated Boxes Model: Prefabricated Modular Panels

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Walk-in cooler to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. 2. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched

between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps". Non-exposed exterior finishes are to be manufacturer's standard gage stucco embossed aluminum. Interior finishes are to be a baked on white polyester .032 stucco aluminum. Exposed exterior finishes are to be 22 Ga. stainless steel. Floor panels to have 0.100” aluminum treadplate high traffic reinforced finished floor surface. No wood will be permitted in any panels or doors.

3. One (1) 36" x 84" entrance door and frame. Door shall be added to existing cooler. Door to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and three cam lift hinges. Hardware

to have provisions for locking and a safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box.

b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with clear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt clear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed, where possible.

c. Door to have vinyl strip curtains. d. Unheated pressure relief port (air-vent). e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable

alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory.

f. Provide a 14" 24" viewport. g. Provide 36" tall aluminum diamond treadplate on interior and exterior.

4. Two (2) LED light fixtures, for field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible.

5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, corners, and joints to building walls. Contractor to verify dimensions.

6. Building soffit to be installed by G.C. so that it comes down to the top of the walk-in cooler on the Dex side (above the glass display doors). Contractor to verify dimensions.

7. Walk-in to be installed in 4” deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. Coordinate floor so that there is a flush transition from the existing cooler to the Grab-n-Go cooler.

8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard #7.

9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural framework over the top of the walk-in compartment, and supported by the walk-in walls.

10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space, using standard panels.

11. 120V 1Ph, 208V 1Ph, IW. (Continued next page)


ITEM 1: WALK-IN GRAB-N-GO COOLER WITH DISPLAY DOORS-RECESSED 4" (Continued)

12. 24" Wide Glass Doors: Anthony model #401 with side lights and shelving: A. 24" Wide by 73" high hinged glass display doors as shown on plans. Provide maximum

number of doors possible in a single framed opening. Doors to be fabricated of polished extruded aluminum frames, pull type door handles, self closing hinges and tempered insulating safety glass. Doors and frames to be heated to eliminate condensation. Doors to have adjustable closing tension.

B. LED lights to be provided at each side of each door for display illumination. Electrical junction boxes to be provided for 120V 1Ph service. Light fixtures to be suitable for low- temperature operation and to include lamps, shields and pre-wired ballast.

C. Each door to have 27” deep white epoxy display shelving assembly with six (6) tiers. 13. New walk-in cooler to be connected to existing cooler. 14. Refer to sheet QF7.01 for further details. ITEM 2: WALK-IN SHELVING-EXISTING Quantity: Sixteen (16) ITEM 3: GLASS DOOR FREEZER-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 4: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 5: BATCH HEAT TREATMENT MACHINE-FUTURE BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Taylor Co. Model: CH03-Air Cooled

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Allows the operator to incorporate a hot process to mix, heat, refrigerate, hold, and age gelato or other frozen dessert mixes. Using a hot process improves mix stability, assures a rich, creamy texture, and maintains quality frozen product in the display case. Flexible equipment may also be used for specialty recipes, like pudding, inverted sugar, slush base, syrup toppings or hot chocolate. 2. 208V 1Ph.


ITEM 6: REFRIGERATED SELF-SERVE ISLAND DISPLAY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Structural Concepts Model: FSI65R

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Oasis® Refrigerated Self-Service Island, 66-1/4"L, 61"H, curved open, (3) non-lit shelves, top light, black interior & lower front exterior panel, double row 1" bumper, price tag moulding, levelers, Breeze™ w/EnergyWise self-contained refrigeration, NSF7. 2. Breeze w/EnergyWise self-contained refrigeration w/evaporator pan, air intake one side/air discharge out other side, standard. Provide oversized evaporator pan. 3. 208v/60/1ph, 20.475 amps, 3-wire plus ground required, cord w/NEMA 6-30P. 4. NOTE: Compressor air intake in one side/air discharge out other side, all lower panels cannot be blocked. 5. NOTE: Units are supplied w/levelers extended 1-1/4" and MUST be adjusted during installation to ensure unit is level for operation. 6. Interior: Stainless steel. 7. Exterior laminate finish to be determined by Interior Designer. 8. Lower Front Panel: Black, standard. 9. Add Lights (T-8) to shelves. ITEM 7: FIXINS SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Basic configuration to be stainless steel base cabinet with décor top and faces, as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Interior Designer’s details (QF5 Series drawings) and specifications

for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Provide a cut-out in counter top for a 6" diameter stainless steel trash insert. 4. Provide an open base for trash container. 5. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. 6. Provide a removable undershelf below refrigerated cold pan (only at floor sink) to allow access to the floor sink.


ITEM 8: NARROW COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: 8148-EFN

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. LiquiTec™ Slim Line Drop-In Cool Food Unit, 2-pan size, 4" or 6" deep pans flush w/counter top, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized outer liner, self-contained Eutectic fluid refrigerated system, NSF-7, 1/4 hp. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 7.5 amps, NEMA 5-15P, IW. 3. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 4. Compressor shall be detached from the cold pan and sit directly below cold pan in counter base. 5. Remote On/Off Switch, for in-counter mounting. ITEM 9: FOOD SHIELD WITH LIGHTS AND END PANEL-WALL MOUNT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3500-6

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single self service, wall mount, fully adjustable, 12" wide tempered glass panel (Verify that this will be acceptable with the health department), 1" diameter aluminum tubing single supports. 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. T-8 3500k Fluorescent Slimline Light, 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", NSF, UL Listed - Extend wiring through leg support, into wall, down behind counter and connect to j-box in counter. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Exterior finish to match food shield. 7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges.


ITEM 10: GELATO BATCH FREEZER WITH OUTDOOR REMOTE CHILLER-PROVIDED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Cattabriga/Advanced Gourmet Model: F90/AG50-3

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Cattabriga’s new revolutionary generation of horizontal batch freezers that guarantee exceptional results. They fully comply with all international safety and hygiene regulations and use cutting edge technology to guarantee softness, low temperature, great servability, and top quality ice cream. 2. Model GV036CK3 glycol unit-out door, 208V 3Ph. 3. 208V 3Ph, Cord and Plug, CW. 4. Rinse hose. ITEM 11: CONDIMENT PUMPS-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: Eight (8) ITEM 12: TRASH CONTAINER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: Nine (9)


ITEM 13: WORK COUNTER WITH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. 2. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Provide with Sink, similar to detail FSD5-2. 4. Provide single 10" deep integral sink similar to detail FSD5-2. Size and location as shown on plan. Provide waste lever bracket similar to detail FSD1-13. 5. Provide One (1) Fisher 3113 or T&S B-0201 deck mount faucet (12" spout) and one (1) rotary waste assembly. 6. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 7. Provide hinged louvered access doors at compressor locations. 8. Provide sufficient ventilation for compressors, add fan if needed. 9. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 10. Doors to have continuous pulls. 11. Provide keyed locks for doors. 12. Backsplash at wall and adjacent equipment, similar to FSD1-5A. 13. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. 14. HW, CW, IW. 15. Provide a removable undershelf below the triple shake machine (only at floor sink) to allow access

to the floor sink. ITEM 14: COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Atlas Metal Model: RMX-1

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Cold Food Drop-In Unit, refrigerated, 3" recessed top, 1-pan size, remote refrigeration, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized steel outer liner, digital thermostat, expansion valve, thermostat bracket & filter drier, NSF-7. 2. Model 2029 Compressor, 1/5 HP, for remote installation. 3. 120v/60/1-ph, std., IW. 4. Model RS Remote On/Off Switch, for counter mounting. 5. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 6. Compressor shall be detached from the cold pan and sit directly below cold pan in counter base. 7. Adapter Plate, blank, full perimeter beaded edge, fits any standard 12" x 20" opening.


ITEM 15: ICE CREAM TEMPERING FREEZER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: ALT132WUT-HHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Freezer, Reach-in, One-Section, self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth, wide half-height doors, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls. 2. 0 degrees Fahrenheit holding temperature, standard. 3. 120v/60/1ph, 9.4 amps, w/cord & NEMA 5-15P, standard. 4. Door hinged on right, standard. 5. Casters, 6" high (set of 4) ITEM 16: MILK DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Silver King Model: SKMAJ2/C4

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Majestic Series Milk Dispenser, refrigerated, accommodates 3, 5 or 6 gallon bags with two platforms, double valve, adjustable temperature control, stainless steel exterior & interior, 1/10 hp, UL, NSF. 2. 120V 1Ph. ITEM 17: MILK SHAKE MIXER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hamilton Beach Model: HMD400

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Drink Mixer, triple spindle, three separate modular motors with 3 speeds on each motor, stainless steel agitator, includes three stainless steel cups, (3)1/3 HP, 120v/60/1-ph, UL, cULus, NSF listed. 2. Provide three extra stainless steel cups. 3. Provide three stainless steel collars. ITEM 18: HOT FUDGE DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: One (1)


ITEM 19: TOPPINGS DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: Cal-Mil Plastic Model: STACKABLE BULK CEREAL DISPENSER

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. This cereal dispenser offers 450 cubic inch capacity, and also has a stack-able feature that allows you to display multiple cereals/toppings. ITEM 20: BLAST FREEZER AND MOBILE WORK TABLE-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Techfrost/Advance Tabco Model: JOF ONE/MS-300

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Counter top blast freezer, stainless steel construction and shelving. 2. Core probe. 3. 208V 1Ph. 4. Model MS300 Work Table, 30" wide top, without splash, 30" long, with adjustable undershelf, s/s frame & shelf, 16 gauge, type 304 stainless steel top, s/s bullet feet. Casters, heavy duty - set of 4, with brakes. ITEM 21: ICE CREAM AND SHAKES SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Provide a removable undershelf to allow access to the floor sink.


ITEM 22: CONE HOLDER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Tomlinson Industries Model: SF1002

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Simpli-Flex Ice Cream Cone Dispenser, self-adjusting, tubular pull-type, for medium to large cones, NSF certified. 2. Provide three (3) 24" long stainless steel tubes. ITEM 23: GELATO MERCHANDISER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ciam Model: 6040 G1 JEWEL TOP

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Sliding door on operator side and lift up door on customer side, stainless steel adjustable feet, galvanized steel base, 404A refrigerant, digital control panel, 52" Long. 2. Exterior laminate finish to be determined by Interior Designer. 3. Dipperwell with faucet. 4. Two sets of 5 Liter pans. 5. LED lighting. 6. Owner to determine if stepped displays, perforated trays or a cone holder is required. 7. 208V 3Ph 20 Amps, Hard Wired, Indirect Waste. ITEM 24: HAND SINK Quantity: Four (4) Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model: 7-PS-91

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Hand Sink, pedestal mounted base, 14" wide x 10" front-to-back x 5" deep, 20 gauge stainless steel construction, electronic faucet, basket drain, wall bracket. 2. Model K-08 Low-flow aerator 0.5gpm. 3. Model 7-PS-10 P-trap, heavy duty, 1-1/2", 17 gauge. 4. Model 7-PS-17 Welded Side Splash, 7-3/4" tall, both sides, for hand sinks with 10"x14" bowls & splash mounted faucets. 5. 120V 1ph, HW, CW, DW. ITEM 25: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 26: SOAP/TOWEL DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: Four (4) ITEM 27: COFFEE BREWER AND AIRPOTS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bunn Model: TF-DUAL-DBC-0000

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 34600.0004 DUAL TF DBC BrewWISE® Dual ThermoFresh® DBC Coffee Brewer, 18.9 gal/hr, coffee extraction controlled w/pre-infusion & pulse brew, digital temperature control, large spray head, automatic programming, stores individual recipes, SplashGard® & optional funnel locks, wireless brewer-grinder interface, stainless steel finish, lower hot water faucet, wireless brewer- grinder interface, holds (2) 1-1/2 gallon ThermoFresh servers (servers sold separately), 120/208v/60/1-ph, 6600w, 27.4amps, UL, NSF 2. Provide a total of (6) six servers, model TF-1.5G 42750.0000 TF ThermoFresh® Servers with Digital Sight Gauge w/Base, 1.5 gallon, portable, brew-through lid, volume indicator display, 4- hour digital count-up timer, drip-tray, fast flow faucet w/large cup clearance, soft-grip bail handle, vacuum insulated, contemporary styling & wrap program, battery operated, stainless steel finish, use for with Single or Dual TF DBC Brewers, NSF 3. 39000.0002 EQHP-25L Easy Clear® High Water System, 25,000 gallon, reduced sediment, chlorine taste & odor, reduction @ 2.1 gpm, equipment protection, scale inhibitors with "L" model, 0.2 micron, includes: a head assembly, integral mounting bracket and cartridge filter, Quick Connect, NSF. ITEM 28: COFFEE GRINDER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bunn Model: G9-HD-T-0003

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. 05800.0003 G9T HD Coffee Grinder, portion control, single 9 lb hopper, stainless decor, accepts large brew funnels for System III, Dual & other large Bunn® Brewers, 3/4 HP, 120v/60/1-ph, 9.4amps, NEMA 5-15P, cord attached, UL, ETL



Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. 2. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Provide with Sink, similar to detail FSD5-2. 4. Provide single 10" deep integral sink similar to detail FSD5-2. Size and location as shown on plan. Provide waste lever bracket similar to detail FSD1-13. 5. Provide One (1) Fisher 3113 or T&S B-0201 deck mount faucet (12" spout) and one (1) rotary waste assembly. 6. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 7. Provide an open base for trash container. 8. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 9. Doors to have continuous pulls. 10. Provide keyed locks for doors. 11. Backsplash at wall and adjacent equipment, similar to FSD1-5A. 12. HW, CW, IW. ITEM 30: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 31: REFRIGERATOR, REACH-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: AHT232WUT-HHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Refrigerator, Reach-in, Two-Section, self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth, wide half-height doors, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls. 2. 120v/60/1ph, 8.2 amps, w/cord & NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 4. Casters, 6" high (set of 4) 5. Provide four additional standard shelves. ITEM 32: SELF-SERVE REFRIGERATED OPEN AIR SCREEN CASE-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: One (1)


ITEM 33: PIZZA DISPLAY-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 34: HOT SANDWICH DISPLAY-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 35: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 36: CUP DISPENSER-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 37: SODA/ICE DISPENSER-EXISTING (BIB) Quantity: Two (2) - Verify that dispensers are compatible with nugget ice machines and remote ice delivery equipment, Items #38 and 100. ITEM 38: ICE MACHINE, NUGGET COMPRESSED Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Follett Corporation Model: HCF1400AHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Horizon™ Ice Machine with RIDE™ remote ice delivery equipment, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, for automatically filling countertop ice and beverage dispensers, up to 1450 lb production of Chewblet® ice in 24 hours, no stainless steel top kit required, NSF, UL, cUL. 2. 208-230/60/3 14 Amps., CW, IW. 3. Installation inspection - recommended for RIDE remote applications. 4. Model 00978957 High capacity water filter system (one per ice machine) for use with all Follett ice machines and ice and water dispensers, filtration capacity 15,000 gallons. 5. Model 00133934 Wall Mount Bracket, for ice machines with HCC1400A/W RIDE™ remote ice delivery equipment. 6. Install remote ice delivery equipment so that the tubing is hidden from the public as much as possible to the back side of the soda dispenser. ITEM 39: POS STATION-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: Two (2)


ITEM 40: SERVICE NON-REFRIGERATED PASTRY CASE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Structural Concepts Model: CGS3830

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Impulse® Service Non-Refrigerated Countertop Case, 38"L, straight front glass & ends, (3) lighted shelves, top light, clear glass swinging doors, black interior & exterior, NSF2. 2. NOTE: If GFCI is required, a GFCI breaker MUST be used in lieu of a GFCI receptacle. 3. 120v/60/1ph, 12" cord w/NEMA 5-15P. ITEM 41: DEX CASHIER COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Counter top at Item #40 to be 24". Remainder of counter top to be at 34". 4. Entire counter to be pre-wired to a built-in circuit breaker panel. This shall include all

outlets, J-boxes, conduit, wiring, electrical components, and accessories attached to, or built into the counter. All conduit, with wiring, shall be concealed from view, and installed in a manner which will not interfere with the intended use of the counter. Panel to include a main breaker for single circuit service connection, and individual breakers for items included in the counter. Panel and electrical components and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Verify and coordinate panel service circuit size, load, phasing, and requirements with the Electrical Engineer's documents, and the Electrical Division.


ITEM 42: DEX SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Counter shall have an open cabinet base. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Provide a cut-out in counter top for a 6" diameter stainless steel trash insert. 4. Provide an open base for trash container. 5. Counter top height to be 30” high. 6. Provide a removable undershelf below the existing hot sandwich display (only at floor sink) to

allow access to the floor sink. 7. Entire counter to be pre-wired to a built-in circuit breaker panel. This shall include all

outlets, J-boxes, conduit, wiring, electrical components, and accessories attached to, or built into the counter. All conduit, with wiring, shall be concealed from view, and installed in a manner which will not interfere with the intended use of the counter. Panel to include a main breaker for single circuit service connection, and individual breakers for items included in the counter. Panel and electrical components and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Verify and coordinate panel service circuit size, load, phasing, and requirements with the Electrical Engineer's documents, and the Electrical Division.

ITEM 43: ICE CREAM SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Open cabinet base on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Compressor to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressor. 4. Send shop drawings to food shield manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs.


ITEM 44: CLEAR GLASS SHIELD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3500-4 Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single full service/vertical partition, fully adjustable, 18" wide tempered glass, 1" diameter aluminum tubing single supports, NSF 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 7. Install on Item #43, Ice Cream Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 45: ICE CREAM DIPPING CABINET, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: N227 1. Ice Cream Dipping Cabinet, drop-in type, 12 gallon capacity, self-contained freezer 404A, removable cover w/handle, stainless steel top and lid, cUL, NSF, 1/5 hp 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 5.3 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Install unit so that the temperature dial is easily accessible. ITEM 46: PREP TABLE WITH SINKS AND WALL SHELF-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 47: FOOD PROCESSOR-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 48: TABLE WITH SINK, SHELF AND UTENSIL RACK-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1)


ITEM 49: MIXER WITH STAND-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1)

ITEM 50: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 51: BACK-TO-BACK COOK LINE WITH HOOD-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1) ITEM 52: MOBILE TABLE-EXISTING Quantity: Two (2) ITEM 53: WALK-IN COOLER-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION (NEW DOORS TO BE ADDED) Quantity: One (1) Door Assembly Manufacturer: Bally Refrigerated Boxes Model: 36" Wide Swing Door

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. One (1) 36" x 84" entrance door and frame. Door shall be added to existing cooler in location

shown on plan. Provide interior and exterior finishes to match existing walk-in. Door to be hinged as shown on plan. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and three cam lift hinges. Hardware






2. Verify all dimensions with building conditions and existing walk-in for proper fit. 3. 120V 1Ph-Tie into existing electrical.


ITEM 54: WALK-IN FREEZER-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION (COILS MAY NEED TO BE RELOCATED) Quantity: One (1) - Coils may need to be relocated if Item #58, Pallet Breakdown Cooler, is installed. ITEM 55: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 56: MOBILE SHELVING-EXISTING Quantity: Two (2) ITEM 57: PIZZA PREP TABLE-EXISTING Quantity: One (1)


ITEM 58: PALLET BREAKDOWN COOLER-RECESSED 4" -OWNER PROVIDED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bally Refrigerated Boxes Model: Prefabricated Modular Panels

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Walk-in cooler to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. 2. Panels to be interchangeable, with U.L. Labeled, CFC free urethane insulation sandwiched

between interior and exterior metal surfaces, with an overall thickness of 4 inches. Edges of panels to be high-density urethane "tongue and groove", with cam-lock assemblies, set-in-place at time of fabrication. The access ports are to be on the interior, for inside assembly of the walk-in, and shall be covered with "snap caps". Exterior finishes are to be manufacturer's standard gage stucco embossed aluminum. Interior finishes are to be a baked on white polyester .032 stucco aluminum. Floor panels to have a 14 Ga. galvanized steel floor with .25” aluminum treadplate overlay. Floor must accommodate 2500 lb. pallets. No wood will be permitted in any panels or doors.

3. Coordinate installation with existing swing door from existing cooler. Provide new swing door at existing freezer. Provide new sliding door.

4. One (1) new 36" x 84" swing door and frame. Door shall be added between existing freezer and pallet cooler. Door to be hinged as shown on plans. The door to be flush type, constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, hydraulic piston driven door closer and three cam lift hinges. Hardware






4. Eight (8) LED light fixtures, for field installation by the Electrical Division. All light fixtures to be U.L. Listed for use inside walk-in cooler or freezer. All conduit and wiring is to be concealed, where possible.

5. Matching finish trim strips, from floor to ceiling, at all exposed vertical edges, corners, and joints to building walls. Contractor to verify dimensions.

6. Matching finish closure panels from top of walk-in to finished ceiling, on exposed sides. Contractor to verify dimensions.

7. Walk-in to be installed in 4” deep building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess, and provide sand and shims as necessary for a completely level walk-in floor. Coordinate floor so that there is a flush transition from the existing walk-ins into the pallet cooler.

8. Unit and all components to be N.S.F. Approved, U.L. and U.L. Classified with a flame spread of 25 or less, and meet the April 1, 1998 requirements of N.S.F. Standard #7.


(Continued next page)

ITEM 58: PALLET BREAKDOWN COOLER-RECESSED 4" OWNER PROVIDED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (Continued) 9. For any installation requiring additional ceiling support, provide self-supporting ceiling structural

framework over the top of the walk-in compartment, and supported by the walk-in walls. 10. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit

available space, using standard panels. 11. 120V 1Ph, 208V 1Ph, IW. 12. 60" Wide Automatic Sliding Door: A. Automatic Electric Slide Door Assembly. The door to be constructed and insulated in the same manner as the wall panels, and finished inside and out, to match adjacent walls. Door and door section to be equipped with the following: a. Power Operator assembly. 14" x 23" View port, high-security lock, tread aluminum wainscot to 36" inside and out. Interior/exterior pull handle. b. Provide door section with an incandescent type vapor-proof light with clear globe and heavy-duty 100-watt clear bulb, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. All conduit and wiring to be concealed and wire-guarded, where possible. c. Door to be complete with HD stainless steel bang doors with reinforced base panels, photo electric sensors, push button switch. d. Pressure relief port (air-vent)-unheated. e. Audio-visual alarm to be included in door section, with remote sensor and adjustable alarm points to indicate the temperature inside, and sound an alarm when the temperature is unsatisfactory. The alarm shall have a mute switch to silence the audible alarm and a reset button to reset the alarm once the temperature conditions are satisfactory. The alarm to be capable of connecting to Owner's building monitoring system. f. Extruded aluminum header and casings. All exposed hardware fasteners, angle brackets, reinforcements, etc. to be stainless steel with ground edges and heavy duty plastic protective covers on exposed bolt ends. 13. New walk-in cooler to be connected to existing cooler and existing freezer. 14. Provide an 8" tall pallet wall guard where pallets are shown. See detail on sheet QF7.01. 15. Refer to sheet QF7.01 for further details. ITEM 59: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 60: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 61: FREEZER, PASS-THRU Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: ALT232WPUT-HHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Freezer, Pass-Thru, Two-Section, self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth, wide half-height doors, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls. 2. 10 degrees Fahrenheit high capacity freezer operation 208/120/60/1. 3. Thermometer side (servery): Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 4. Rear: Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 5. Kool Klad laminate decor on servery side only. Color to be determined by Interior Designer. ITEM 62: REFRIGERATOR, PASS-THRU Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: AHT232WPUT-HHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Refrigerator, Pass-Thru, Two-Section, self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth, wide half-height doors, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls. 2. 120v/60/1ph, 8.6 amps, w/cord & NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Thermometer side (servery): Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 4. Rear: Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 5. Kool Klad laminate decor on servery side only. Color to be determined by Interior Designer.



Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. 2. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Provide with Sink, similar to detail FSD5-2. 4. Provide single 10" deep integral sink similar to detail FSD5-2. Size and location as shown on plan. Provide waste lever bracket similar to detail FSD1-13. 5. Provide One (1) Fisher 3113 or T&S B-0201 deck mount faucet (12" spout) and one (1) rotary waste assembly. 6. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 7. Backsplash at wall and adjacent equipment, similar to FSD1-5A. 8. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 9. Doors to have continuous pulls. 10. Provide keyed locks for doors. 11. HW, CW, IW. 12. Provide a removable undershelf below the sink (only at floor sink) to allow access to the floor sink. ITEM 64: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model: WS-12-36

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Shelf, wall-mounted, stainless steel, 12" wide, 3 feet long. 2. Model TA-30 Right Side splash, 1-1/2" high. ITEM 65: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 66: WORK COUNTER WITH OVERSHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 3'-0" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. 2. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 4. Provide hinged louvered access doors at compressor locations. 5. Provide sufficient ventilation for compressors, add fan if needed. 6. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 7. Doors to have continuous pulls. 8. Provide keyed locks for doors. 9. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. 10. Overshelf - Similar to standard detail FSD1-28. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM 67: INFRARED FOOD WARMER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hatco Model: GRA-36

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Glo-Ray® Infrared Foodwarmer, standard wattage, tubular metal heater rod, single heater rod housing, aluminum construction, 575 watts. 2. 120v/60/1-ph. 3. Model BLT TOG-1 (1) Built-in toggle control. 4. Install food warmer below overshelf on Item #66, Work Counter. ITEM 68: FOOD WARMER-EXISTING Quantity: One (1)


ITEM 69: COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Atlas Metal Model: RMX-1

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Cold Food Drop-In Unit, refrigerated, 3" recessed top, 1-pan size, remote refrigeration, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized steel outer liner, digital thermostat, expansion valve, thermostat bracket & filter drier, NSF-7. 2. Model 2029 Compressor, 1/5 HP, for remote installation. 3. 120v/60/1-ph, std., IW. 4. Model RS Remote On/Off Switch, for counter mounting. 5. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 6. Compressor shall be detached from the cold pan and sit directly below cold pan in counter base. 7. Adapter Plate for each cold pan, blank, full perimeter beaded edge, fits any standard 12" x 20" opening. ITEM 70: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 71: GRIDDLE, GAS, WITH REFRIGERATED DRAWERS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Montague Company Model: DG2460-SAT

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Legend 60" Heavy-Duty Griddle, gas, 1" thick ground & polished steel plate, 24" deep grill area, (5) snap action thermostatic controls, safety pilot ignition, 3/4" NPT rear manifold with pressure regulator, stainless steel front and sides, painted black undercoating, 4" adjustable legs, 150,000 BTU. 2. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold. 3. Model SST Solid State Thermostat. 4. Model RB-60-SC Legend Heavy Duty Extreme Cuisine Refrigerated Equipment Base/Stand, 60" self-contained, two sections of drawers on 14 gauge stainless steel track system, (2) 14-3/8" & (2) 22-3/8" wide drawers, (5) pan capacity (pans NOT included), welded stainless steel body, frame, front, sides & top, 120v/60/1-ph, 1/4 hp, 8.9 amps, cord & plug. 5. Casters w/5" wheel 6" OA (set of 6) 6. Verify altitude and type of gas. 7. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 8. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel

gas hose assembly 48" long, with FreeSpin fittings and SwiveLinks on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installation/restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing Division's use in installing the hose components.


ITEM 72: WORK COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 3'-0" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. 2. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 4. Provide hinged louvered access doors at compressor locations. 5. Provide sufficient ventilation for compressors, add fan if needed. 6. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 7. Doors to have continuous pulls. 8. Provide keyed locks for doors. 9. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors.


ITEM 73: ISLAND EXHAUST HOOD WITH MUA Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Captive-Aire Model: 5430ND-2-PSP-F

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Assembly to consist of two (2) sections. Each section to be 12' long x 54" wide, plus make-up air

plenums. 2. 18 Gauge type 304 stainless steel, including any exposed back. 3. External welded construction in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 96. All welds to be

ground and polished. 4. U.L. Classified, removable, stainless steel grease filters. 5. Stainless steel, removable grease cans. 6. Sloped grease trough, full length below filters to grease cans. 7. Hangers, supports and miscellaneous accessories as required for installation. 8. Air space at wall to accommodate requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 96 clearance to

combustibles. 9. All welded duct collars. 10. Pre-piping for hood fire suppression system. 11. Final connections to hood duct collars by the Mechanical Division. 12. Hood construction and components to be UL and NSF listed. 13. Mounting height of bottom edge of hood to be 6'-8" above finished floor (minimum and normal) to

7'-0" above finished floor (maximum). 14. T-8 3500k Recessed fluorescent light fixtures and tubes, U.L. listed for use in commercial cooking

hoods, NSF approved. 15. Verify and coordinate all dimensions, and duct requirements and locations with site conditions and

Mechanical Division. 16. See ventilation drawing sheet for general size and location of ducts. 17. If not installed against the finished ceiling, provide matching stainless steel closure panels above

hood to finished ceiling, to conceal ducts and hood fire suppression system piping; verify height. If finished ceiling is more than 24” above the top of the hoods, or ceiling is open type ceiling, verify requirement for closure panels with Architect/Interior Designer.

18. Refer to sheet QF8 series for further details.


ITEM 74: CHARBROILER, GAS, WITH REFRIGERATED DRAWERS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Montague Company Model: UFLCS-36R

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Legend Char-Broiler, shallow depth low-profile, 36" heavy duty countertop, self-cleaning stainless steel radiants, 2-position cast iron Ultra-Flow reversible top grate, stainless steel front & top trim, 3/4" rear gas, with pressure regulator, 4" adjustable nickel legs, 114,000 BTU, NSF, CE. 2. Model RB-36-SC Legend Heavy Duty Extreme Cuisine Refrigerated Equipment Base/Stand, 36" self-contained, one section of drawers on 14 gauge stainless steel track system, (2) 14-3/8" wide drawers, (2) pan capacity (pans NOT included), welded stainless steel body, frame, front, sides & top, 120v/60/1-ph, 8.2 amps, 1/4 hp, cord & plug. 3. Casters w/5" wheel 6" OA (set of 4), in lieu of legs. 4. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold. 5. S/S right side for broiler. 6. S/S left side for broiler. 7. Verify altitude and type of gas. 8. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 9. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel


ITEM 75: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 76: GRIDDLE, GAS,WITH REFRIGERATED DRAWERS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Montague Company Model: M36-8T

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Legend 36" Heavy Duty Range, gas, (1) 36" fry top, 3/4" thick, manual control, stainless steel front & 4" flue riser , 60,000 BTU. 2. Model RB-36-SC Legend Heavy Duty Extreme Cuisine Refrigerated Equipment Base/Stand, 36" self-contained, one section of drawers on 14 gauge stainless steel track system, (2) 14-3/8" wide drawers, (2) pan capacity (pans NOT included), welded stainless steel body, frame, front, sides & top, 6" adjustable stainless steel legs, 120v/60/1-ph, 8.2 amps, 1/4 hp, cord & plug. 3. Casters w/5" wheel 6" OA (set of 4), in lieu of legs. 4. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold. 5. Cap & stainless steel manifold cover, left. 6. Cap & stainless steel manifold cover, right. 7. Sides, stainless steel for range. 8. Thermostats for fry top. 9. Verify altitude and type of gas. 10. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 11. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel



ITEM 77: SPLIT POT FRYER W/BASKET LIFTS, DUMP STATION AND FILTER Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Frymaster Model: H55-2BLC-SC

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. High Efficiency Open Split Pot Gas Fryer, 50 lb capacity per full frypot, with basket lifts and CM3.5 controller, melt cycle, boil-out, electric ignition, center mounted RTD, 1° compensating temperature probe, stainless steel pot, door and cabinet, 40,000 BTU/hr each, part of the Manitowoc EnerLogic™ program, ENERGY STAR®. 2. 120v/60/1-ph. 3. Spreader cabinet, WITH filter, stainless steel door and cabinet 4. Model FPP-2 FootPrint PRO® Model FP Filtration System to go with 2 fryers, 4 gallon per minute pump, internally plumbed oil drain & return lines, with filter starter kit. 5. Spreader located at left end of two fryer battery. 6. Model FWH-1 Food Warmer & Holding Station, includes; heat lamp, cord & plug, 12 x 20 x 2-1/2" stainless steel cafeteria-style pan & screen. 7. Casters with brakes. 8. Model 806-3232 Frypot Covers, split pot, stainless steel. 9. Model 803-0107(L) Sediment Trays, left, split pots. 10. Model 803-0108(R) Sediment Trays, right, split pots. 11. Verify altitude and type of gas. 12. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 13. Fryer assembly must be able to drain into shortening disposal unit, Item #80. Provide additional

components if needed. 14. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel


ITEM 78: WALL FLASHING FROM FLOOR TO 36" A.F.F. Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Similar to standard detail FSD1-39. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Provide 20 Gauge stainless steel panels from the floor to 36" A.F.F.


ITEM 79: FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM FOR #73 Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ansul Model: R-102

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Ansulex Liquid Fire Suppressant. Surface appliance nozzles, hood and duct protection nozzles in Exhaust Hood Item #73. 2. Manual pull station and micro switches with two sets of normally open and two sets of normally closed contact points. 3. All exposed pipe and fittings to be chrome plated or stainless steel. 4. All components and labor necessary for completely installed system in accordance with manufacturers listings and instructions, U.L. Standard 300, UL Standard 1254, NFPA 17A, NFPA-96, and all applicable local codes, standards, and regulations. 5. Components inside exhaust hood to be installed at hood manufacturer's shop during fabrication. 6. Provide with automatic mechanical gas shut off valves (not electric solenoid valves) for equipment below exhaust hood. Coordinate size and installation with Plumbing Division. 7. Six month and twelve month inspections, servicing, and replacement of components as per N.F.P.A. 96. 8. Electrical Division to provide shunt trip breakers at main power panel, or disconnects, as designated by the Electrical Engineer; interconnected with micro switch at fire system control panel, for all electricity in and under exhaust hood. Shunt trips/disconnects to accomplish shut off of electricity in event of fire system activation. 9. Ansul to provide complete shop drawings, locate and/or verify and coordinate system tank(s), panel, and pull station location and requirements, and verify and coordinate with Mechanical Engineer's documents and Division 15's exhaust and supply air requirements for hood; for proper protection of hood and equipment in and below the hood, controlling of associated components, and interconnection of multiple fire systems as required. 10. Provision and installation of components and system to be by dealer and installer authorized, factory trained, and certified to sell, install, and service Ansul fire suppression system as noted in this specification, at the time of bidding, installation, start-up, and warranty period of this project. 11. As part of this item, provide wall mounted type K Ansul hand held portable fire extinguisher, placard, and mounting bracket as required in the immediate vicinity of each cooking area, per NFPA-96 and NFPA-10. Additional fire extinguishers as required in the kitchen area are to be specified by the Architect and provided by the General Contractor. ITEM 80: SHORTENING DISPOSAL UNIT-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Frymaster Model: PSDU50

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Shortening Disposal Unit, 50 lb. oil capacity, manual pump, 9-5/8" drain height, one-way check valve, 6" high strength wheels. 2. Verify that disposal unit will be compatible with specified fryer assemblies.


3. Model 826-2173 Shortening Disposal Hose, 48" ITEM 81: BREAKFAST/GRILL SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Doors to have continuous pulls. 4. Provide an open base for under counter freezer and heated cabinet. 5. Counter top height to be 32” at drop-in chafing dishes, and 42" high in location shown on plan. Remainder of counter top to be at 34". 6. Hinged door at pre-wired electrical. 7. Provide plate shelves in locations shown on plan. 8. Recess controls in apron of counter. Provide protective shields at all knobs, controls, switches, etc. to prevent staff from accidentally bumping into them. 9. Send shop drawings to food shield manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs. 10. Entire counter to be pre-wired to a built-in circuit breaker panel. This shall include all outlets, J-

boxes, conduit, wiring, electrical components, and accessories attached to, or built into the counter. All conduit, with wiring, shall be concealed from view, and installed in a manner which will not interfere with the intended use of the counter. Panel to include a main breaker for single circuit service connection, and individual breakers for items included in the counter. Panel and electrical components and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Verify and coordinate panel service circuit size, load, phasing, and requirements with the Electrical Engineer's documents, and the Electrical Division.

ITEM 82: UNDERCOUNTER FREEZER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: ULT32-R

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Dealer's Choice Compact Undercounter Freezer, 32"W, one-section, reach-in, stainless steel exterior top, sides & door, hinged right, anodized aluminum interior, galvanized exterior back & bottom, rear-mounted self-contained refrigeration, 1/3 Hp. 2. Casters, 2-1/2"-Unit must fit below a 34" high counter top. 3. 120v/60/1ph, 7.1 amps, 8' cord, NEMA 5-15P.


ITEM 83: HEATED CABINET, MOBILE, HALF-HEIGHT Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Alto-Shaam Inc. Model: 750-S

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Halo Heat® Low Temp Holding Cabinet, on/off simple control with adjustable thermostat, indicator light, capacity (10) 12" x 20" pans, (2) chrome plated side racks & (3) wire shelves, heavy duty 20 gauge stainless steel exterior, 2 rigid, 2 swivel with brakes, EcoSmart®, cUL, CE, EnergyStar® rated. 2. 120v/60/1, 9.0amps, 1.1kW, 5' cord, NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Solid state electronic control, LED display, with patented SureTemp heat recovery system. 4. Door hinged on right, standard. 5. Model LK-22567 Door lock with key, per door. 6. Casters, 2-1/2", stem; 2 rigid, 2 swivel with brakes-Unit must fit below a 34" high counter top. ITEM 84: HEATED SHELF, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hatco Model: HBGB-4818

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heated Black Glass Shelf, built-in, 48"L, ceramic glass surface, uniform heat, 100° - 200°F thermostatic control with lighted on/off rocker switch, choice of frame finish, 850w. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 850W, NEMA 5-15P. 3. Stainless steel trim ring. 4. Flush Mounted Control Box with lighted power switch. 5. Install remote control panel on server side of counter. ITEM 85: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 86: FOOD SHIELD WITH WARMERS, LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single self service, fully adjustable, 12" wide tempered glass top & lower panel (Verify that this will be acceptable with the health department)1" diameter aluminum tubing double supports, NSF, UL Listed 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. Stealth Warmer/T-8 3500k Fluorescent Light Combo shall be attached to the bottom of the top

shelf. Extend wiring down through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Separate remote switch for display light. Exterior finish to match food shield.

7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #81, Breakfast/Grill Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Provide extended post in location shown on plans, for an electronic menu sign to be attached to the post. Post shall be 1-1/2" diameter to accommodate the wiring for the electronic menu sign. Kitchen contractor to coordinate installation with signage manufacturer. 12. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 87: WARMING DRAWER, BUILT-IN Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Hatco Model: HDW-1B

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Warming Drawer Unit, Built-in, one drawer, includes (1) standard 6" deep food pan, stainless steel construction, thermostatic controls, 450 watts. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 450 watts, 3.8 amps, 6' cord, NEMA 5-15P. 3. Standard drawer pan.


ITEM 88: DROP-IN CHAFING DISH Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: Vollrath Model: 46258

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. New York, New York® Chafer, 9 qt., fully retractable rect, drop-in, 18-8 s/s mirror finish, dome channel cover, dripless waterpan, SP3 foodpan, 3 position cover, 25-1/2"x18"x18-1/2", attach to countertop with (2) clips/screws (incl). 2. 120V 1Ph universal heater. 3. Provide an SP3 pan for each unit plus an additional five SP3 pans. ITEM 89: HEATED SHELF, DROP-IN Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Hatco Model: HBGB-3618

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heated Black Glass Shelf, built-in, 36"L, ceramic glass surface, uniform heat, 100° - 200°F thermostatic control with lighted on/off rocker switch, choice of frame finish, 630w. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 630W, NEMA 5-15P. 3. Stainless steel trim ring. 4. Flush Mounted Control Box with lighted power switch. 5. Install remote control panel on server side of counter. ITEM 90: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 91: FOOD SHIELD WITH WARMERS, LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930



7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #81, Breakfast/Grill Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 11. One unit - Provide extended post in location shown on plans, for an electronic menu sign to be attached to the post. Post shall be 1-1/2" diameter to accommodate the wiring for the electronic menu sign. Kitchen contractor to coordinate installation with signage manufacturer. 12. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 92: WAFFLE BAKER Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Star Model: SWB8RBLE

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Belgian Waffle Baker, single, 8" round, 1" thick waffle grid. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 11.0 amps, cord w/NEMA #5-15P std.


ITEM 93: CONDIMENT SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. Install a lift-out removable louvered panel. 4. Provide plate shelves in locations shown on plan. 5. Send shop drawings to food shield manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs. ITEM 94: COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: 8118-EF

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. LiquiTec™ Drop-In Cool Food Unit, 1-pan size, 4" or 6" deep pans flush w/counter top, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized outer liner, self-contained Eutectic fluid refrigerated system, NSF-7, 1/4 hp. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 7.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 4. Compressor shall be detached from the cold pan and sit directly below cold pan in counter base. 5. Remote On/Off Switch, for in-counter mounting. 6. Adapter Plate, blank, to fit standard 12" x 20" opening. ITEM 95: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 96: ISLAND FOOD SHIELD WITH LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3915

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard EZ Span Food Shield, double self service, fully adjustable, tempered glass top shelf & 10" wide sneeze guards, 1-1/2" diameter aluminum tubing double supports, NSF, UL Listed 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. T-8 3500k Fluorescent Slimline Light, 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", NSF, UL Listed - Extend wiring down

through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Exterior finish to match food shield.

7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #93, Condiment Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 97: BATTER DISPENSER-BY PURVEYOR Quantity: Two (2) ITEM 98: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 99: TUMBLER DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Piper Products/Servolift Eastern Model: AC-ST-2020-14OZ

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Tumbler Serve™ Dispenser, cabinet style, enclosed base, mobile design, capacity 425 plastic tumblers up to 14 oz., stainless steel construction, 4" swivel casters. 2. Model -PB Full Perimeter Non Marking Bumper. 3. Model -WB Wheel brakes (set of 2) 4. Exterior of dispensers shall have a stainless steel finish. 5. Polyurethane 4" casters, set of 4, with ball bearing seals.


ITEM 100: ICE MACHINE, NUGGET COMPRESSED Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Follett Corporation Model: HCF1400AHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Horizon™ Ice Machine with RIDE™ remote ice delivery equipment, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, for automatically filling countertop ice and beverage dispensers, up to 1450 lb production of Chewblet® ice in 24 hours, no stainless steel top kit required, NSF, UL, cUL. 2. 208-230/60/3 14 Amps., CW, IW. 3. Installation inspection - recommended for RIDE remote applications. 4. Model 00133934 Wall Mount Bracket, for ice machines with HCC1400A/W RIDE™ remote ice delivery equipment. 5. Model 00978957 High capacity water filter system (one per ice machine) for use with all Follett ice machines and ice and water dispensers, filtration capacity 15,000 gallons. 6. Install remote ice delivery equipment so that the tubing is hidden from the public as much as possible to the back side of the soda dispenser. ITEM 101: COUNTER REFRIGERATOR-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: True Food Service Equipment Model: GDM-5

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Countertop Refrigerated Merchandiser, (2) shelves, white aluminum interior w/300 stainless steel floor, (1) Low-E thermal glass hinged door, sign decal, leg levelers, 1/6 HP, 120v/60/1-ph, NEMA 5-15P, 4.3 amps, MADE IN USA. 2. Self-contained refrigeration standard. 3. Left door hinging. 4. Exterior: Stainless Steel. 5. Illuminated sign decal option available. ITEM 102: COFFEE DISPENSER-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 103: CAPPACCINO DISPENSER-EXISTING Quantity: One (1)


ITEM 104: JUICE DISPENSER-EXISTING (BIB) Quantity: One (1) ITEM 105: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 106: TEA DISPENSER-EXISTING (BIB) Quantity: One (1) ITEM 107: MILK DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Silver King Model: SKMAJ2/C4

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Majestic Series Milk Dispenser, refrigerated, accommodates 3, 5 or 6 gallon bags with two platforms, double valve, adjustable temperature control, stainless steel exterior & interior, 1/10 hp, UL, NSF. 2. 120V 1Ph. ITEM 108: WATER DISPENSER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Innowave Model: Chiller 3, Counter Top

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. The innowave Chiller 3™ Counter Top is equipped with In-Tank Sanitization. This feature utilizes ultra violet light as an effective method to prevent the potential for biofilm (slime) buildup in the storage tank after chlorine has been reduced through carbon filtration. 2. NSF/ANSI 61 certified by WQA (Water Quality Association) 3. 120V 1Ph, CW. 4. Provide water filter brackets and water filter.


ITEM 109: BEVERAGE COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Counter top height to be 30”. 4. Provide a removable undershelf below the water dispenser (only at floor sink) to allow access to

the floor sink. ITEM 110: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 111: PULPER/EXTRACTOR WITH CONTROL PANEL Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Somat Model: SPC-75S

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. SPC-75S HT Pulper W/3 HP. Pump & 9" Trough. 2. NEMA 4 stainless steel Som-A-Trol electric control panel. 3. Valve package. 4. Lid for pulper. 5. One (1) remote Push Button Station. 6. Chemical additive pump. 7. Automatic shutdown timer. 8. 9" Wide feed trough flange connection. 9. Provide trough flush nozzles for installation in scrap trough, as follows: A. One (1) at far end of trough. B. Additional nozzle for every 6' of trough. 10. Verify configuration and position with plans, adjacent equipment and site conditions. 11. 208V 3Ph, HW, CW, IW. 12. Coordinate installation with Soiled Dishtable, Item #112, or ADD ALT Soiled Dishtable with Three Tier Accumulator, Item #236. 13. Refer to sheet QF11.01 for further details. 14. Vibration isolators from Mason Industries, Inc. to be installed at the factory.


ITEM 112: SOILED DISHTABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traycon Model: Custom

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Soiled dishtable with gravity rollers and 9" wide trough. PVC Rollers with stainless steel bearings. 2. DishTable 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. Standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. Similar to standard details FSD1-4B, FSD1-5C, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD4-2 and FSD4-4. 3. Provide gravity rollers from end of trough to corner loader of dish machine. Dish racks shall be able to load automatically. 4. Provide Quick Drain Grate at dish machine, similar to detail FSD1-34. 5. Provide Scrap Trough, length and width as shown on plan, similar to detail FSD4-6, with 2" removable basket. 6. Scrap trough shall have Fisher 2906 or T&S B-2292 water trough inlets, mixing valve, shut off valve and vacuum breaker. Contractor shall interconnect all components with 1/2" minimum I.D. lines. Provide silver saver in end of trough adjacent to pulper. Silver saver to be pinned or held in place, but allow pivoting up for complete cleaning of the trough. Bottom edge of silver saver shall match contour of bottom of trough. Bottom of trough shall slope 2" minimum from fill end to pulper end; and full length bottom of trough to be pitched down to center of trough 1", from both sides. 7. Provide open base at existing silver soak sinks. Provide rack storage below gravity rollers. Provide undeshelf below table, where possible. 8. Coordinate installation with Pulper/Extractor, Item #111,and Steam Coil Dish Machine, Item #121. ITEM 113: MOBILE RACKING TABLE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traycon Model: Custom

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. Similar to standard details FSD1-4A and FSD2-6. 2. 24” Wide x 24” long x 30” tall, undershelf below, marine edge on all sides of table top. 3. 5" Heavy-duty casters, two (2) with brakes. 4. Table top to hold a 20” x 20” rack.


ITEM 114: CEILING MOUNT HOSE REEL Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Fisher Model: 32026

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Hose Reel Assembly, ceiling mount, stainless steel covered reel rinse with spray valve, 30 feet of 3/8" ID, 3 ply, 2 braid hose, pressure of 200 PSI, 1/2" NPT female inlet 2. General Contractor to install ceiling mounting brackets for hose reel. 3. Coordinate installation so that hoses hang straight down over trough. ITEM 115: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 116: DISH PASS-THRU WINDOW Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traycon Model: Custom

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. Similar to standard details FSD1-37. 2. Nine sections. Each section to have three tiers. Each tier to be 9” tall. Bottom of lowest tier to be 8” above the dishtable. Refer to QF4.01A for section view. ITEM 117: SILVERWARE CHUTE Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Traycon Model: Custom

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Provide two silverware chutes through the wall, from the drop-off side to the dishroom side. Similar to standard detail FSD4-11. Coordinate installation with the soiled dishtable and silver soak sinks. Refer to QF4.01A for section view. ITEM 118: SILVER SOAK SINK-EXISTING Quantity: Two (2)


ITEM 119: VENT DUCT-LOAD END Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Vent Stacks similar to standard detail FSD15-2. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Verify configuration and dimensions with Item #121, Steam Coil Dish Machine, and site conditions. ITEM 120: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 121: STEAM COIL DISH MACHINE WITH BOOSTER AND ELECTRIC BLOWER DRYER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Stero Model: ER94S D

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Dishwasher w/Pre-Scrapper, conveyor type, high temp., three tank, 268 racks per/hour, tank heat to be specified, auto fill, shut-down timer, recirculated power wash, recirculated power rinse fresh water 180° sanitizing, stainless steel front panel, tank & hood, (2) 2 HP, 1 HP, NSF, UL 921. 2. Left to Right operation. 3. 208v/60/3 ph, std. Mounted circuit breakers. 4. Steam Coil tank heat, 15-40 PSI consumption @ 20 PSI flow (thermostatic control & low water cut-off) 5. Model SWB-260 Booster Heater, steam, final rinse water, floor mounted on stainless steel legs & feet, for a 70° rise. 6. Inter-plumbing and inter-wiring steam booster heater. 7. Cold water Aquastat for scrapper. 8. Drain water tempering kit. 9. Table limit switch. 10. Insulated cabinet doors for scrappers & conveyor machine. 11. Shock arrestor and pressure reducing valve kit. 12. Steam control valve and steam trap. 13. Refer to sheet QF6.01 for further details. 14. Modify legs to accept ND double deflection neoprene anti-vibration mount. Contractor to install mounts in field.


ITEM 122: VENT DUCT-UNLOAD END Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Vent Stacks similar to standard detail FSD15-2. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Verify configuration and dimensions with Item #121, Steam Coil Dish Machine, and site conditions. ITEM 123: CLEAN DISHTABLE WITH OVERSHELVES Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traycon Model: Custom

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. "U" Shaped dishtable with gravity rollers, overshelves, and open base for booster heater and cart storage. 2. Install table limit switch for dish machine in end of dish table. 3. IW. 4. PVC Rollers with stainless steel bearings. 5. Two ( 2 ) #14 GA. stainless steel rack storage shelves with #12 Ga. adjustable stainless steel brackets on 1 1/2" conveyor mounted uprights. 6. Refer to sheet QF12.01 for further details. ITEM 124: DISH DOLLY-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Five (5) Manufacturer: CresCor Model: 501-D

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Dish Dolly, poker chip style, w/two adjustable adapters, 4 section platform, compartments without adjustable adapters hold 9-7/8" to 10-3/4" dishes, compartments with adjustable adapters hold 4" to 7-1/4" dishes. 2. Model 1056-000 Corner Bumpers, non-marking gray rubber bumpers, adds 2" to depth and width. 3. 5" Polyurethane casters.


ITEM 125: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 126: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 127: GLASS RACK CART-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Six (6) Manufacturer: CresCor Model: 500-2020

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Dish Rack Dolly, platform design, single stack, designed for 20" x 20" racks, all aluminum construction, 5" swivel casters (2 with brakes) 2. Model 1408-015 Push Handle, rigid for 500-1326-2 transport dolly. 3. Model 1056-017 Corner Bumpers for 500-2020 transport dolly. ITEM 128: 18" DEEP WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model: WS-18-60

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Shelf, wall-mounted, stainless steel, 18" wide, 5 feet long. 2. Install shelf at 48" A.F.F. ITEM 129: MOBILE PLATE DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: APW Wyott Model: ML2-10

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Lowerator® Dispenser, Dish, cabinet style, enclosed base, mobile design, two self-elevating dish dispensing tubes, maximum dish size 10 1/8" diameter, stainless steel construction. 2. [TEXT DELETED] 3. Provide full perimeter bumper guard. ITEM 130: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 131: MOBILE SORTING TABLE WITH SORTING SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Similar to standard details FSD1-4A, FSD5-1A, FSD1-7, FSD1-8, FSD1-10, FSD2-5, and FSD12-

5. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions.

2. Mount on 5” heavy-duty casters, front with brakes. 3. 6” High splash on rear, with stainless steel enclosure on back side of splash. 4. Slanted overshelf 18” above the table top, with two rows of holes for silverware cylinders;

maximum possible. 5. Flat overshelf, 12” over slanted overshelf. 6. Overshelves to be mounted to three (3) 1 1/4” diameter stainless steel tube supports, extending

down through the table top backsplash, through an extension of the table top underbracing, and down to brackets back of the undershelf. Fully weld all joints and seams.

7. Table top to pitch to one end and 1 1/2” drain fitting, with flat top strainer. Connect 6’ of flexible poly tubing to drain fitting, and provide hanging hook on opposite end; for hanging on table top when not in drain location.

8. Full length stainless steel undershelf. ITEM 132: HANDSINK WITH SOAP/TOWEL DISPENSER-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 133: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 134: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 135: COMPRESSOR FOR #1-OUTDOOR, AIR COOLED Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Bally Refrigerated Boxes Model: BESA020M6-HT3B Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. One (1) pre-assembled, semi-hermetic, remote, air-cooled, 208V 3Ph R404A cooler compartment

refrigeration system. System to consist of condensing unit (high side assembly) and low profile evaporator coil (low side assembly), evaporator mounting kit, thermostatic expansion valve, pump-down cycle kit, solenoid valve, temperature control, sight glass, drier, vibration eliminator, pressure control, crankcase heater, extreme low ambient controls, weatherproof housing, (water control valves) and any accessories necessary for a completely installed and functional system for a cooler box temp of +35 to + 40 degrees F. Verify exact installation location with Architect, architectural plans, and site conditions.

2. Contractor’s certified refrigeration mechanic to install all components supplied with the compressor, as per manufacturer's instructions. Also furnish and install refrigeration lines, insulation, refrigerant and accessories as per manufacturer's instruction's and as required.

3. Refer to sheet QF7.01 for further details. ITEM 136: COMPRESSOR FOR #58-OUTDOOR, AIR COOLED - OWNER PROVIDED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Bally Refrigerated Boxes Model: BESA030M6-HT3B Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. One (1) pre-assembled, semi-hermetic, remote, air-cooled, 208V 3Ph R404A cooler compartment

refrigeration system. System to consist of condensing unit (high side assembly) and low profile evaporator coil (low side assembly), evaporator mounting kit, thermostatic expansion valve, pump-down cycle kit, solenoid valve, temperature control, sight glass, drier, vibration eliminator, pressure control, crankcase heater, extreme low ambient controls, weatherproof housing, (water control valves) and any accessories necessary for a completely installed and functional system for a cooler box temp of +35 to + 40 degrees F. Verify exact installation location with Architect, architectural plans, and site conditions.


3. Refer to sheet QF7.01 for further details. ITEM 137: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 138: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 139: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 140: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 141: BACK-TO-BACK COOK LINE WITH HOOD-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1) ITEM 142: WALK-IN COOLER-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1) ITEM 143: HEATED CABINET-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: Three (3) ITEM 144: TABLE WITH SINK, SHELF AND UTENSIL RACK-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 145: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 146: TABLE-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1) ITEM 147: COUNTER-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1) ITEM 148: TABLE-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1) ITEM 149: HANDSINK WITH SOAP/TOWEL DISPENSER-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION


Quantity: One (1) ITEM 150: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 151: ROLL-IN BLAST CHILLER-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1) ITEM 152: ICE MACHINE WITH BIN-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1) ITEM 153: DRY STORAGE SHELVING-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: Ten (10) ITEM 154: TABLE-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 155: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 156: TABLE WITH SINK-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 157: TABLE-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 158: 60 QUART MIXER-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 159: SHELVING-EXISTING Quantity: Four (4) ITEM 160: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 161: TRASH CONTAINER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: One (1) ITEM 162: POWER SOAK SINK Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Power Soak Model: Custom

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. (1) T&S #B-0133-B08-PS pre-rinse spray. 2. (2) T&S #B-0290-PS faucets. 3. (3) 1-1/2" IPS Rear exit rotary ball valve drains #DBN-9100-PS. 4. (1) Utensil basket. 5. PS-200 Control package. 6. 208V 3Ph, HW & CW, IW 7. Coordinate installation with mini pulper assembly, Item #163. 8. Refer to sheet QF14.1 for further details. ITEM 163: MINI PULPER ASSEMBLY Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: InSinkErator Model: WX-300-7-WX101

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:

1. Waste Xpress System, includes Waste Xpress unit, 3 HP disposer, #7 collar adapter for sink mount, fully programmable WX-101 disposer control panel, up to 700 lb of waste per hour, 10 gallon trash bin, stainless steel construction, table not included. 2. Install unit in Pot SInk, Item #162 or ADD-ALT Soiled Pot Table, Item #239. 3. 208v/60/3-ph, 7.0 amps. 4. Model 10GAL BIN Rubbermaid® Brute® Trash Can, 10 gallon. 5. Model WX FLANGE KIT Inlet/Outlet Flange Kit, for Waste Xpress systems, universal fit for either side waste inlet or either side water outlet, includes gasket and instructions, for secondary cabinet drain line in high water flow installations. ITEM 164: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model: WS-15-120

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Shelf, wall-mounted, stainless steel, 15" overall width, 10 feet long.


ITEM 165: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 166: CAN WASHER-EXISTING-REMAIN IN CURRENT LOCATION Quantity: One (1) ITEM 167: FREEZER, REACH-IN-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: ALT132WUT-HHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Freezer, Reach-in, One-Section, self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth, wide half-height doors, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls. 2. 0 degrees Fahrenheit holding temperature, standard. 3. 120v/60/1ph, 9.4 amps, w/cord & NEMA 5-15P, standard. 4. Door hinged on left. 5. Casters, 6" high (set of 4) ITEM 168: HEATED CABINET, PASS-THRU Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: AHF232WP-HHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Heated Cabinet, Pass-Thru, Two-Section, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth cabinet, half-height doors, (3) chrome plated adjustable shelves per section, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls, 6" adjustable stainless steel legs, NSF, UL, ENERGY STAR®. 2. 208/120v/60/1ph, 15.5 amps, standard. 3. Thermometer side: Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 4. Rear: Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 5. Provide two additional standard shelves. ITEM 169: REFRIGERATOR, PASS-THRU Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: AHT132WPUT-HHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Refrigerator, Pass-Thru, One-Section, self-contained


refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth, wide half-height doors, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls. 2. 120v/60/1ph, 7.2 amps, w/cord & NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Thermometer side door: hinged on right, standard. 4. Rear door hinged on right, standard. 5. Provide two additional standard shelves. ITEM 170: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 171: WORK TABLE WITH SINKS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. 2. Standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. Similar to standard details FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. 3. Work Table with Backsplash and Undershelf, similar to detail FSD2-5. 4. 6" High Backsplash similar to detail FSD1-5A on left end only. 5. Dough press to sit on 26" high counter top, in location shown on plans. 6. Provide two (2) 10" deep integral sinks, similar to detail FSD2-7. Size and location as shown on plan. Provide waste lever bracket similar to detail FSD1-13. Provide One (1) Fisher 3113 or T&S B-0201 deck mount faucet (12" spout) and two (2) rotary waste assemblies. 7. Provide one (1) 10" deep integral sink, similar to detail FSD2-7. Size and location as shown on plan. Provide waste lever bracket similar to detail FSD1-13. Provide One (1) Fisher 3113 or T&S B-0201 deck mount faucet (12" spout) and one (1) rotary waste assembly. 8. Provide stainless steel adjustable bullet feet. 9. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 10. Provide Three (3) Tiered Drawer Assembly. Each drawer shall be 20" x 20" x 5" deep , similar to detail FSD1-15 and FSD1-16, number and location as shown on plans. 11. Provide an undershelf below entire table, except at sinks. ITEM 172: WALL SHELF Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Single tier wall mounted shelf similar to standard detail FSD12-1B. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions.


ITEM 173: PIZZA DOUGH PRESS-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: DoughPro Model: DP3300

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. PizzaPro™ Pizza Dough Press, counter model, automatic electro-mechanical operation w/digital time & temperature control, dial-in thickness adjustment, heated upper platen, to 18" dia. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 1450w, 12.5 amps, 6'cord & plug. ITEM 174: REFRIGERATOR, REACH-IN-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: AHT232WUT-HHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Refrigerator, Reach-in, Two-Section, self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth, wide half-height doors, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls. 2. 120v/60/1ph, 8.2 amps, w/cord & NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 4. Casters, 6" high (set of 4) ITEM 175: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 176: MOBILE WORK TABLE, 96"-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model: SS-308

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Work Table, 30" wide top, without splash, 96" long, with adjustable undershelf,


stainless steel frame & shelf, 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel top, stainless steel bullet feet. 2. Model TA-256 Casters, heavy duty - set of 6. 3. Model TA-25B Brakes, on all casters. 4. Model TA-94 16 gauge stainless steel 304 series undershelf upgrade. ITEM 177: TRASH CONTAINER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: Two (2) ITEM 178: HAND SINK Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model: 7-PS-91

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Hand Sink, pedestal mounted base, 14" wide x 10" front-to-back x 5" deep, 20 gauge stainless steel construction, electronic faucet, basket drain, wall bracket. 2. Model K-08 Low-flow aerator 0.5gpm. 3. Model 7-PS-10 P-trap, heavy duty, 1-1/2", 17 gauge. 4. Model 7-PS-17 Welded Side Splash, 7-3/4" tall, both sides, for hand sinks with 10"x14" bowls & splash mounted faucets. 5. 120V 1ph, HW, CW, DW. ITEM 179: SOAP/TOWEL DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: Two (2) ITEM 180: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 181: INTERNATIONAL/PIZZA SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Doors to have continuous pulls. 4. Provide an open base for under counter freezer. 5. Counter top height to be 30” at locations shown on plan. Remainder of counter top to be at 34". 6. Hinged door at pre-wired electrical. 7. Provide plate shelves in locations shown on plan. 8. Recess controls in apron of counter. Provide protective shields at all knobs, controls, switches, etc. to prevent staff from accidentally bumping into them. 9. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. 10. Send shop drawings to food shield manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs. 11. Cutting board to be 10" wide x 3/4" thick, NSF approved, ultra high density linear polyethylene, in

two (2) equal sections; removable, reversible, interchangeable and held in place by S/S pins welded to counter top.

12. Provide a removable undershelf below the hot food well (only at floor sink) to allow access to the floor sink.

13. Cut hole in counter top for cord from carving station. Locate hole below carving station so that it is not visible. Provide grommet.

14. Entire counter to be pre-wired to a built-in circuit breaker panel. This shall include all outlets, J-boxes, conduit, wiring, electrical components, and accessories attached to, or built into the counter. All conduit, with wiring, shall be concealed from view, and installed in a manner which will not interfere with the intended use of the counter. Panel to include a main breaker for single circuit service connection, and individual breakers for items included in the counter. Panel and electrical components and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Verify and coordinate panel service circuit size, load, phasing, and requirements with the Electrical Engineer's documents, and the Electrical Division.

ITEM 182: HEATED SHELF, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hatco Model: HBGB-4818


Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heated Black Glass Shelf, built-in, 48"L, ceramic glass surface, uniform heat, 100° - 200°F thermostatic control with lighted on/off rocker switch, choice of frame finish, 850w. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 850W, NEMA 5-15P. 3. Stainless steel trim ring. 4. Flush Mounted Control Box with lighted power switch. 5. Install remote control panel on server side of counter. ITEM 183: FOOD SHIELD WITH WARMERS, LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930



7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #181, International/Pizza Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Provide extended post in location shown on plans, for an electronic menu sign to be attached to the post. Post shall be 1-1/2" diameter to accommodate the wiring for the electronic menu sign. Kitchen contractor to coordinate installation with signage manufacturer. 12. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble.


ITEM 184: COMBI OVEN, ELECTRIC, FULL SIZE WITH MOBILE STAND-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Eloma Model: GENIUS T 10-11E

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. GeniusT Combi Oven/Steamer, electric, boilerless, full-size, counter top, auto-clean, steam, convection, low-temp, Delta-T, retherm, cook n' hold, roasting, baking & proofing, holds (10) 18"x 26" pans, includes (5) wire racks, hand spray, self-cleaning, programmable, one-handed touch operation, HACCP data stored, digital controls, temperature probe, includes (1) unit cleaner and (1) unit rinse aid, insulated glass door, interior lamps, chrome nickel steel interior & exterior, ETL (includes 4 hours Eloma certified chef training) 2. 208v/60/3ph, 19.0 kw, 60.0 amps, standard., CW, IW. 3. Door hinged on right. 4. Model E0506916 Support Stand, for 10-11 electric. 5. Model E504920 Casters, set of four; two locking. 6. Model E000002 Installation Kit, for electric ovens. Kit includes: (2) 4' reinforced water appliance hose, (1) 90 degree neoprene elbow with clamps for 2" copper pipe, (1) straight neoprene connector with clamps for 2" copper pipe, 5' of 2" copper pipe, (2) 2" 90 degree copper elbows, (1) 2" milford clamp (NET) 7. Model E504235 Mavea Brita Purity 1200 Water Filter, includes vessel, head and cartridge. 8. One (1) Dormont or T&S commercial use and N.S.F. Approved poly coated flexible stainless steel

water hose assembly 48" long, with quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing Division's use in installing the hose components.



ITEM 186: EXHAUST HOOD WITH MUA Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Captive-Aire Model: 6030ND-2-PSP-F

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Assembly to consist of one (1) section to be 15'-8" long x 60" wide, plus make-up air plenum. 2. 18 Gauge type 304 stainless steel, including any exposed back. 3. External welded construction in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 96. All welds to be









ITEM 187: FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM FOR #186 AND #216 Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ansul Model: R-102

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Ansulex Liquid Fire Suppressant. Surface appliance nozzles, hood and duct protection nozzles in Exhaust Hoods Item #186 and #216. 2. Manual pull station and micro switches with two sets of normally open and two sets of normally closed contact points. 3. All exposed pipe and fittings to be chrome plated or stainless steel. 4. All components and labor necessary for completely installed system in accordance with manufacturers listings and instructions, U.L. Standard 300, UL Standard 1254, NFPA 17A, NFPA-96, and all applicable local codes, standards, and regulations. 5. Components inside exhaust hood to be installed at hood manufacturer's shop during fabrication. 6. Provide with automatic mechanical gas shut off valves (not electric solenoid valves) for equipment below exhaust hood. Coordinate size and installation with Plumbing Division. 7. Six month and twelve month inspections, servicing, and replacement of components as per N.F.P.A. 96. 8. Electrical Division to provide shunt trip breakers at main power panel, or disconnects, as designated by the Electrical Engineer; interconnected with micro switch at fire system control panel, for all electricity in and under exhaust hood. Shunt trips/disconnects to accomplish shut off of electricity in event of fire system activation. 9. Ansul to provide complete shop drawings, locate and/or verify and coordinate system tank(s), panel, and pull station location and requirements, and verify and coordinate with Mechanical Engineer's documents and Division 15's exhaust and supply air requirements for hood; for proper protection of hood and equipment in and below the hood, controlling of associated components, and interconnection of multiple fire systems as required. 10. Provision and installation of components and system to be by dealer and installer authorized, factory trained, and certified to sell, install, and service Ansul fire suppression system as noted in this specification, at the time of bidding, installation, start-up, and warranty period of this project. 11. As part of this item, provide wall mounted type K Ansul hand held portable fire extinguisher, placard, and mounting bracket as required in the immediate vicinity of each cooking area, per NFPA-96 and NFPA-10. Additional fire extinguishers as required in the kitchen area are to be specified by the Architect and provided by the General Contractor.


ITEM 188: CHARBROILER, GAS, WITH OVEN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Montague Company Model: 136XLB/UFLC-36R

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Legend Char-Broiler/Oven, 36", range match, gas, , removable self-cleaning stainless steel radiants, 2-position grid frame, reversible cast-iron top grates, 1" flue riser, front venting oven, 26- 5/8"W x 28-1/4"D x 10"H, stainless steel front & sides, 146,000 BTU. 2. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold. 3. Cap & stainless steel manifold cover, left. 4. Cap & stainless steel manifold cover, right. 5. Casters w/5" wheel 6" OA (set of 4) 6. Verify altitude and type of gas. 7. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 8. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel


ITEM 189: MODULAR GRIDDLE, GAS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Montague Company Model: M36-8T

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Legend 36" Heavy Duty Range, gas, (1) 36" fry top, 3/4" thick, manual control, stainless steel front & 4" flue riser, 60,000 BTU. 2. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold. 3. Cap & stainless steel manifold cover, left. 4. Cap & stainless steel manifold cover, right. 5. Sides, stainless steel for range. 6. Thermostats for fry top. 7. Griddle to be the same height as the adjacent open burner range. 8. Verify altitude and type of gas. 9. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 10. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel



ITEM 190: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 191: MODULAR OPEN BURNERS, GAS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Montague Company Model: M12-5

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Legend 12" Add-A-Unit Heavy Duty Range, gas, (2) 30,000 BTU open burners, stainless steel front & 4" flue riser, 40,000 BTU. 2. 3/4" Rear gas connection. Cap and cover both ends of front manifold. 3. Cap & stainless steel manifold cover, left. 4. Cap & stainless steel manifold cover, right. 5. Sides, stainless steel for range. 6. Open burners to be the same height as the adjacent griddle. 7. Verify altitude and type of gas. 8. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 9. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel


ITEM 192: REFRIGERATED DRAWER BASE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Montague Company Model: RB-48-SC

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Legend Heavy Duty Extreme Cuisine Refrigerated Equipment Base/Stand, 48" self-contained, one sections of drawers on 14 gauge stainless steel track system, (2) 27-1/4" wide drawers, (4) pan capacity (pans NOT included), welded stainless steel body, frame, front, sides & top, 120v/60/1-ph, 1/4 hp, 8.2 amps, cord & plug. 2. Casters w/5" wheel 6" OA (set of 6), in lieu of legs.


ITEM 193: SPLIT POT FRYER W/BASKET LIFTS, DUMP STATION AND FILTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Frymaster Model: H55-2BLC-SC

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. High Efficiency Open Split Pot Gas Fryer, 50 lb capacity per full frypot, with basket lifts and CM3.5 controller, melt cycle, boil-out, electric ignition, center mounted RTD, 1° compensating temperature probe, stainless steel pot, door and cabinet, 40,000 BTU/hr each, part of the Manitowoc EnerLogic™ program, ENERGY STAR®. 2. 120v/60/1-ph. 3. Spreader cabinet, WITH filter, stainless steel door and cabinet 4. Model FPP-2 FootPrint PRO® Model FP Filtration System to go with 2 fryers, 4 gallon per minute pump, internally plumbed oil drain & return lines, with filter starter kit. 5. Spreader located at left end of two fryer battery. 6. Model FWH-1 Food Warmer & Holding Station, includes; heat lamp, cord & plug, 12 x 20 x 2-1/2" stainless steel cafeteria-style pan & screen. 7. Casters with brakes. 8. Model 806-3232 Frypot Covers, split pot, stainless steel. 9. Model 803-0107(L) Sediment Trays, left, split pots. 10. Model 803-0108(R) Sediment Trays, right, split pots. 11. Verify altitude and type of gas. 12. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 13. Fryer assembly must be able to drain into shortening disposal unit, Item #80. Provide additional

components if needed. 14. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel


ITEM 194: WALL FLASHING Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Similar to standard detail FSD1-39. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum


guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Cover wall behind the cooking equipment from the finished floor to the bottom of the exhaust hood, the length of the exhaust hood. ITEM 195: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 196: WORK COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. 2. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 4. Provide an open base for heated cabinets. 5. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 6. Doors to have continuous pulls. 7. Provide keyed locks for doors. 8. Backsplash at wall, similar to FSD1-5A. ITEM 197: HEATED CABINET, MOBILE, HALF-HEIGHT-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Alto-Shaam Inc. Model: 750-S

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Halo Heat® Low Temp Holding Cabinet, on/off simple control with adjustable thermostat, indicator light, capacity (10) 12" x 20" pans, (2) chrome plated side racks & (3) wire shelves, heavy duty 20 gauge stainless steel exterior, 2 rigid, 2 swivel with brakes, EcoSmart®, cUL, CE, EnergyStar® rated. 2. 120v/60/1, 9.0amps, 1.1kW, 5' cord, NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Solid state electronic control, LED display, with patented SureTemp heat recovery system. 4. Door hinged on right, standard. 5. Model LK-22567 Door lock with key, per door. 6. Casters, 2-1/2", stem; 2 rigid, 2 swivel with brakes-Unit must fit below a 34" high counter top.


ITEM 198: MOBILE PLATE DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: APW Wyott Model: ML2-10

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Lowerator® Dispenser, Dish, cabinet style, enclosed base, mobile design, two self-elevating dish dispensing tubes, maximum dish size 10 1/8" diameter, stainless steel construction. 2. [TEXT DELETED] 3. Provide full perimeter bumper guard. ITEM 199: CLEAR GLASS SHIELD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3500-4 Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single full service/vertical partition, fully adjustable, 18" wide tempered glass, 1" diameter aluminum tubing single supports, NSF 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 7. Install on Item #181, International/Pizza Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 8. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 200: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 201: DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELL UNIT, ELECTRIC Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: N8745-D

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Drop-In Hot Food Well Unit, Electric, individual pans, wet/dry type with drain & manifold, 3-pan size for 12" x 20" pans, remote control panel w/individual thermostat controls, stainless steel top & wells, galvanized outer liner. 2. 208v/60/1-ph, 15.0 amps, standard. 3. Automatic water fill kit 4. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 5. Install remote control panel on server side of counter. ITEM 202: CARVING STATION, COUNTERTOP-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Alto-Shaam Inc. Model: CS-200

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Hot Carving Shelf, 30-7/8" x 26" x 30-7/8", indicator light, infrared lamp, (3) position ON/OFF toggle switch, cutting board, recessed surface, 1" legs, 18 gauge stainless steel construction, EcoSmart®, cUL, CE, NSF. 2. 120v/60/1, 6.3 amps, 0.75kW, cord, NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Model BA-28066 Cutting Board, 21-5/8" x 21-5/8" x 1/2" 4. Model HL-2635 Carving Holder, prime rib. ITEM 203: DROP-IN CHAFING DISH Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: Vollrath Model: 46258



1. New York, New York® Chafer, 9 qt., fully retractable rect, drop-in, 18-8 s/s mirror finish, dome channel cover, dripless waterpan, SP3 foodpan, 3 position cover, 25-1/2"x18"x18-1/2", attach to countertop with (2) clips/screws (incl). 2. 120V 1Ph universal heater. 3. Provide an SP3 pan for each unit plus an additional five SP3 pans. ITEM 204: HEATED SHELF, DROP-IN Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Hatco Model: HBGB-3618

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heated Black Glass Shelf, built-in, 36"L, ceramic glass surface, uniform heat, 100° - 200°F thermostatic control with lighted on/off rocker switch, choice of frame finish, 630w. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 630W, NEMA 5-15P. 3. Stainless steel trim ring. 4. Flush Mounted Control Box with lighted power switch. 5. Install remote control panel on server side of counter. ITEM 205: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 206: FOOD SHIELD WITH WARMERS, LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single self service, fully adjustable, 12" wide tempered glass top & lower panel (Verify that this will be acceptable with the health department)1" diameter aluminum tubing double supports, NSF, UL Listed 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. Stealth Warmer/Fluorescent Light Combo shall be attached to the bottom of the top shelf. Extend

wiring down through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Separate remote switch for display light. Exterior finish to match food shield. 7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #181, International/Pizza Serving Counter, as shown on plans.


11. Provide extended post in location shown on plans, for an electronic menu sign to be attached to the post. Post shall be 1-1/2" diameter to accommodate the wiring for the electronic menu sign. Kitchen contractor to coordinate installation with signage manufacturer. 12. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 207: UNDERCOUNTER FREEZER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: ULT32-R

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Dealer's Choice Compact Undercounter Freezer, 32"W, one-section, reach-in, stainless steel exterior top, sides & door, hinged right, anodized aluminum interior, galvanized exterior back & bottom, rear-mounted self-contained refrigeration, 1/3 Hp. 2. Casters, 2-1/2"-Unit must fit below a 34" high counter top. 3. 120v/60/1ph, 7.1 amps, 8' cord, NEMA 5-15P. ITEM 208: REFRIGERATED BASE WITH PANS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Refrigerated Base, size and configuration as shown on plan. Similar to standard details FSD1-24, FSD1-26, FSD5-3 and FSD5-4. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Undercounter refrigerator to have compatible coil(s) with thermo expansion valve and a Copelaweld, med temp, air cooled condensing unit complete with air drier, sight glass, pressure and temperature controls, interconnecting tubing, refrigerant and any accessories necessary for a completely functional system for a box temperature of +35 to +40 degrees F., with a 15 degree T.D. 3. Compressor compartment to have hinged louvered access panels, dividers and additional fan for proper ventilation. Provide 1" minimum insulation on top and sides of compressor compartment to prevent the transfer of heat. 4. Provide each section with stainless steel wire bottom shelf and adjustable mid shelf. 5. Hinge doors as indicated on plan. 6. Install in Counter Item #181, International/Pizza Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 7. Compressor shall be detached from the refrigerated base and sit next to it in the counter base. 8. 404A refrigerant.


ITEM 209: CLEAR GLASS SHIELD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3500-4 Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single full service/vertical partition, fully adjustable, 18" wide tempered glass, 1" diameter aluminum tubing single supports, NSF 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 7. Install on Item #181, International/Pizza Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Provide extended post in location shown on plans, for an electronic menu sign to be attached to the post. Post shall be 1-1/2" diameter to accommodate the wiring for the electronic menu sign. Kitchen contractor to coordinate installation with signage manufacturer. 10. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 210: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 211: REFRIGERATOR, ROLL-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: ARI132HUT-FHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Refrigerator, Roll-in, One-Section, self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth cabinet, full-height doors, accepts 72" high rack, with INTELA-TRAUL™, 1/3 hp. 2. 120v/60/1ph, 10.6 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Door hinged on left.


ITEM 212: UNIVERSAL ANGLE PAN RACK CART-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 213: PIZZA CUT TABLE-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: John Boos Model: GRVBLOCK Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Grooved Block Kitchen Island, 24" W x 72" L x 36" H, 7" thick laminated Hard Rock maple end grain work surface with penetrating oil finish, dual grooved detailing around tops & legs, wood legs & natural maple slatted undershelf. 2. Stain finish to be determined by Interior Designer. ITEM 214: PIZZA OVEN, TRIPLE DECK TYPE, GAS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bakers Pride Model: 453

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Convection Flo Pizza Deck Oven, gas, 54"W x 34-1/2"D bake deck, three 8" high sections, with ceramic decks, throttling thermostat range 300°F - 650°F, stainless steel exterior, 240,000 BTU. 2. Gas type to be determined. 3. Automatic oven starter, per deck. 4. Model SGC-100 Gas Connector Hose, 1" connection, for stationary equipment, 48" long, stainless steel braid with yellow PVC coating. 5. Model T5149X Oven Deck Brush, steel wire bristles, wood handle, 48" long. 6. S/S leg covers. ITEM 215: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 216: EXHAUST HOOD WITH MUA Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Captive-Aire Model: 6630ND-2-PSP-F






Mechanical Division. 16. See ventilation drawing sheet for general size and location of ducts. 17. If not installed against the finished ceiling, provide matching stainless steel closure panels above hood to finished ceiling, to conceal ducts and hood fire suppression system piping; verify height. If finished ceiling is more than 24” above the top of the hoods, or ceiling is open type ceiling, verify requirement for closure panels with Architect/Interior Designer. 18. Refer to sheet QF8 series for further details. ITEM 217: WALL FLASHING Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel


Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Similar to standard detail FSD1-39. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Cover wall behind the cooking equipment from the finished floor to the bottom of the exhaust hood, the length of the exhaust hood. ITEM 218: MOBILE ENCLOSED RACK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: CresCor Model: 103-UA-11D

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Cabinet, Mobile Enclosed, 57-3/4" high, single wall non-insulated, universal slides for 12" x 20" thru 18" x 26" pans, 11 sets of slides on 4-1/2" centers, aluminum exterior and interior. 2. Model 1136-000 Lock Hasp, for non-insulated cabinets. 3. Model 1430 Floor Lock, for use with 5" casters. 4. 5" polyurethane casters. 5. Side and Rear Bumper, add 2" to O.A. dimensions, non-marking, gray ITEM 219: PIZZA PREP TABLE, REFRIGERATED Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: TS072HT Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Prep Table, 72"W, two-section, reach-in, holds (10) 1/3 pan rail capacity with insulated lid, infinitely adjustable mounting rail, 15" work surface, thermal expansion valve, hinged LH/RH, (2) shelves per section, Intela-Traul (R) control set to 34-38°F, side-mounted self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior and interior, 6" casters, 1/2 Hp, 115v/60/1-ph, 9.0 amps, 9' cord, NEMA 5-15P, NSF, cUL. 2. 120v/60/1ph, 9.0 amps, 9' cord, NEMA 5-15P. 3. S/S finished back. 4. 1/2" x 18" White plastic cutting board. 5. 16 gauge, stainless steel overshelf, 16-1/4" deep. 6. 3.5" casters (ADA compliant) 7. Additional shelf for each section. ITEM 220: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 221: CEREAL SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Provide bowl shelves in locations shown on plan. 4. Provide a double bowl shelf below milk dispenser as shown on plans. 5. Provide cereal spill drawers below cereal dispensers. Two (2) toppings grates with pull-out drawer

assembly. Drawers to accommodate standard size pans. ITEM 222: CEREAL BIN-EXISTING Quantity: Two (2) ITEM 223: MILK DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Silver King Model: SKMAJ3/C4

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Majestic Series Milk Dispenser, refrigerated, accommodates 3, 5 or 6 gallon bags with three platforms, triple valve, adjustable temperature control, stainless steel exterior & interior, 1/6 hp, UL, NSF. 2. 120v/60/1ph, 1.6 amps, NEMA 5-15P, std, ITEM 224: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 225: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 226: CONDIMENT SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. Install a lift-out removable louvered panel. 4. Provide plate/decorative shelves in locations shown on plan. 5. Send shop drawings to food shield manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs. 6. Duplex convenience outlet to be installed with-in the cabinet base below the cold pan. Provide hole in counter top with grommet. ITEM 227: COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: 8118-EF

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. LiquiTec™ Drop-In Cool Food Unit, 1-pan size, 4" or 6" deep pans flush w/counter top, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized outer liner, self-contained Eutectic fluid refrigerated system, NSF-7, 1/4 hp. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 7.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 4. Compressor shall be detached from the cold pan and sit directly below cold pan in counter base. 5. Remote On/Off Switch, for in-counter mounting.


ITEM 228: ISLAND FOOD SHIELD WITH LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3915

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard EZ Span Food Shield, double self service, fully adjustable, tempered glass top shelf & 10" wide sneeze guards, 1-1/2" diameter aluminum tubing double supports, NSF, UL Listed 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. T-8 3500k Fluorescent Slimline Light, 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", NSF, UL Listed - Extend wiring down

through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Exterior finish to match food shield.

7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #226, Condiment Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 229: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 230: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 231: BUFFET SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes



1. Basic configuration to be stainless steel base cabinet with décor top and faces, as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Interior Designer’s details (QF5 Series drawings) and specifications

for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Counter top must be able to accommodate the under counter induction warmers, Item #232. 4. Counter top to be same depth as wall niche. ITEM 232: INDUCTION WARMER-UNDER COUNTER Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: CookTek Model: B651-U

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Incogneeto™ Induction Buffet, under-counter-top design, mounts to underside of counter-top, temperature selected via control panel or Magneeto™ 2 locator/controller disc, automatic pan detection, lock feature, red LED display, polycarbonate top, aluminum housing, 650 watts, ETL, NSF, CE. 2. 120v/50/60/1-ph, 5 amps, 6' cord, NEMA 5-15P. ITEM 233: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 234: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 235: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 236: SOILED DISHTABLE WITH THREE TIER ACCUMULATOR-ADD ALTERNATE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traycon Model: OTC-18-3-L

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Complete assembly with stainless steel window frame, sill, and sight and sound barrier with lights at tray drop area. Stainless steel soiled dish table with integral trough, (2) two auto plate rinse station, pulper flange connection, and removable sections of R101 gravity rollers. 2. System to be designed for handling 20" X 14" trays and 20" X 20" racks. 3. Trayless application. Three tier accumulator to have stainless steel wire form shelves with solid inserts. Stainless steel 14 Ga. tray carrier panels. 4. 18 Ga. stainless steel double pan insulated sight/sound baffle with three incandescent light fixtures. 5. Two deck mounted automatic plate rinse faucets.


6. Coordinate installation with Pulper/Extractor, Item #111,and Steam Coil Dish Machine, Item #121. 7. Refer to sheet QF12.01 for further details. ITEM 237: RACKING TABLE-ADD ALTERNATE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traycon Model: Custom

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Portable dual racking table, 44" x 41". Existing soak sinks to fit below. The existing soak sinks are approx. 22" tall. Verify exact dimensions with Owner. 2. Refer to sheet QF12.01 for further details. ITEM 238: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 239: SOILED POT TABLE-FABRICATED-ADD ALTERNATE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. Standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. Similar to standard details FSD1-4B, FSD1-5C, FSD1-7, and FSD1-10. 2. Basic dish table configuration to be similar to details FSD4-1 and FSD4-2. 3. Construction at disposer (part of mini pulper, Item #163) to be similar to detail FSD3-5. Provide bracket similar to detail FSD1-14 for disposer controls and water saver switch. Provide holes in the backsplash for vacuum breaker. 4. T & S Brass Model B-0133-B08C EasyInstall Prerinse Unit, spring action gooseneck, 8" wall mount, JeTSpray low flow valve (0.65 gallons per minute), wall bracket. 5. Provide undershelf where possible. ITEM 240: POT WASHER-ADD ALTERNATE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Insinger


Model: SW-12-P

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Pot & Pan Washer, pass-thru, 12 pan capacity per cycle, three position wash selector (300, 420 or 540 seconds), automatic fill, support/utility rack system, pan washer clean up hose & spray gun, lift-up door design, stainless steel construction, ETL, NSF. 2. 208v/60/3-ph, std., HW, IW. 3. Steam coil. 4. S/S bun/sheet pan rack (12 pan capacity) 5. Utensil basket with hold down lid. 6. Contractor to verify direction of operation with plan, site conditions, and adjacent equipment. 7. 70 Degree rise booster heater. ITEM 241: CONDENSATE HOOD-ADD ALTERNATE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Condensate Hood similar to standard detail FSD15-1. This standard detail is to be utilized as a basic minimum guideline only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. ITEM 242: CLEAN POT TABLE-ADD ALTERNATE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. Standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. Similar to standard details FSD1-4B, FSD1-5C, FSD1-7, FSD1-10, FSD4-2 and FSD4-9. 2. Provide undershelf below entire table. ITEM 243: ICE MACHINE, NUGGET COMPRESSED Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Follett Corporation Model: HCF1400AHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Horizon™ Ice Machine with RIDE™ remote ice delivery equipment, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, for automatically filling countertop ice and beverage dispensers, up to 1450 lb production of Chewblet® ice in 24 hours, no stainless steel top kit required, NSF, UL, cUL. 2. 208-230/60/3 14 Amps., CW, IW.


3. Installation inspection - recommended for RIDE remote applications. 4. Model 00133934 Wall Mount Bracket, for ice machines with HCC1400A/W RIDE™ remote ice delivery equipment. 5. Model 00978957 High capacity water filter system (one per ice machine) for use with all Follett ice machines and ice and water dispensers, filtration capacity 15,000 gallons. 6. Install remote ice delivery equipment so that the tubing is hidden from the public as much as possible to the back side of the soda dispenser. ITEM 244: STORAGE SHELVING-FOUR TIER Quantity: Ten (10) Sections Manufacturer: Metro Model: MetroMax (Q) Open Grid Shelving

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Length, width and configuration per plan and verified room dimensions. 2. Each section to be free-standing with four legs. 3. 80” High With Four Tiers ITEM 245: MOBILE CAN STORAGE RACK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: New Age Industrial Model: 1225

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Low-profile mobile design with work top, with sloped glides for auto. can retrieval, aluminum construction with stainless top, holds 72-#10 cans or 96-#5 cans, (4) 5" platform casters, (2) swivel, (2) rigid, NSF. ITEM 246: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 247: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 248: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 249: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 250: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 251: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 252: WORK COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Basic configuration to be stainless steel base cabinet with décor top, as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Interior Designer’s details (QF5 Series drawings) and specifications

for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 4. Provide an open base with cabinet door for trash container. 5. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 6. Doors to have continuous pulls. 7. Provide keyed locks for doors. 8. Backsplash at wall and adjacent equipment, similar to FSD1-5A. 9. Provide a curved counter base at curved counter top. 10. Coordinate installation of paper towel dispenser in cabinet door. Locate dispenser as high as possible in door. ITEM 253: TRASH CONTAINER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: Four (4) ITEM 254: DROP-IN HAND SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model: DI-1-5SP



1. Drop-In Sink, one compartment, 10" wide x 14" front-to-back x 5" deep bowl, 6" tapered side splash, 20 gauge stainless steel, with deck mounted faucet, basket drain. 2. Paint-on sound deadening under top. 3. Low-flow aerator 0.5gpm, fits 55/64-27 male or 15/16-27 female thread on spout. 4. Electronic Faucet, deck mount, 4" center set spout with VR aerator, AC/DC control module, mixing tee. 5. 120V 1Ph, HW, CW, IW. ITEM 255: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 256: DISPENSER, PAPER TOWEL Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Bobrick Washroom Model: B-359

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Classic Series Paper Towel Dispenser, recessed, 12-3/4" W x 17-13/16" H, holds 350 C-fold or 475 multifold towels, satin-finish stainless steel, ADA-ABA & ICC/ANSI. 2. Unit to be installed in cabinet door of Work Counter, Item #252. ITEM 257: REFRIGERATOR, ROLL-IN Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: ARI232HUT-FHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Refrigerator, Roll-in, Two-Section, self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth cabinet, full-height doors, accepts 72" high racks, with INTELA-TRAUL™, 1/2 hp. 2. 120v/60/1ph, 11.4 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 4. Kool Klad laminate decor on all doors. Color to be determined by Interior Designer. ITEM 258: UNIVERSAL ANGLE PAN RACK CART-EXISTING Quantity: Four (4)


ITEM 259: WORK COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Basic configuration to be stainless steel base cabinet with décor top, as selected by the Interior Designer. Refer to Interior Designer’s details (QF5 Series drawings) and specifications

for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 4. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 5. Doors to have continuous pulls. 6. Provide keyed locks for doors. 7. Backsplash at wall and adjacent equipment, similar to FSD1-5A. 8. Provide a curved counter base at curved counter top. 9. Provide protective shields at all knobs, controls, switches, etc. to prevent staff from accidentally bumping into them. ITEM 260: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 261: DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELL UNIT, ELECTRIC Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: N8731-D

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Drop-In Hot Food Well Unit, Electric, individual pans, wet/dry type with drain & manifold, 2-pan size for 12" x 20" pans, remote control panel w/individual thermostat controls, stainless steel top & wells, galvanized outer liner.


2. 120v/60/1-ph, 16.6 amps, no cord & plug, standard. 3. Automatic water fill kit. 4. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 5. Install remote control panel on apron of counter. 6. Provide a cover for each well that will accommodate 11 quart inserts from soup wells, Item #266. ITEM 262: DELI SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Doors to have continuous pulls. 4. Provide a cut-out in counter top for a 6" diameter stainless steel trash insert. 5. Provide an open base for trash container. 6. Hinged door at pre-wired electrical. 7. Recess controls in apron of counter. Provide protective shields at all knobs, controls, switches, etc. to prevent staff from accidentally bumping into them. 8. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. 9. Cutting board to be 10" wide x 3/4" thick, NSF approved, ultra high density linear polyethylene, in

four (4) equal sections; removable, reversible, interchangeable and held in place by S/S pins welded to counter top.

10. Send shop drawings to food shield manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs. 11. Entire counter to be pre-wired to a built-in circuit breaker panel. This shall include all outlets, J-


ITEM 263: COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: 8118-EF


Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. LiquiTec™ Drop-In Cool Food Unit, 1-pan size, 4" or 6" deep pans flush w/counter top, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized outer liner, self-contained Eutectic fluid refrigerated system, NSF-7, 1/4 hp. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 7.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard, IW. 3. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 4. Compressor shall be detached from the cold pan and sit directly below cold pan in counter base. 5. Remote On/Off Switch, for in-counter mounting. ITEM 264: FOOD SHIELD WITH LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single self service, fully adjustable, 12" wide tempered glass top & lower panel (Verify that this will be acceptable with the health department)1" diameter aluminum tubing double supports, NSF, UL Listed 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. T-8 3500k Fluorescent Slimline Light, 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", NSF, UL Listed - Extend wiring down through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Exterior finish to match food shield. 7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #262, Deli/Soup Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble.


ITEM 265: SOUP SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Doors to have continuous pulls. 4. Hinged door at pre-wired electrical. 5. Provide plate shelves in locations shown on plan. 6. Recess controls in apron of counter. Provide protective shields at all knobs, controls, switches, etc. to prevent staff from accidentally bumping into them. 7. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. 8. Send shop drawings to food shield manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs. 9. Two (2) Fisher #3010H fill faucets at soup well units. 10. Entire counter to be pre-wired to a built-in circuit breaker panel. This shall include all outlets, J-


ITEM 266: DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELL UNIT, ELECTRIC Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: Wells Model: SS-10ULTD



1. Food Warmer, top-mount, built-in, electric, for 11-quart round inserts, drain, wet/dry operation, thermostatic controls, stainless steel interior, Wellslok, UL listed, 620w/825w. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 825w, 6.9 amps, direct. 3. Six (6) Model 21057 11 quart Round Insets, with hinged lid, no handles. 4. Model 20385 Drain Valve Extension Kit, extension from drain to counter front with remote handle. 5. Install remote control panels on server side of counter. ITEM 267: SELF SERVE BREAD CASE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Structural Concepts Model: HVB38SS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Non-refrigerated pull-out drawer case, 12" locking power cord, black rear exterior, black interior, small casters, full end panels, chrome wire baskets, reflective glass rear sliding doors, tongs. 2. Trim color and exterior laminate to be determined by Interior Designer. 3. 120V 1Ph. ITEM 268: POP-UP TOASTER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: Three (3) ITEM 269: COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: 8132-EF

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. LiquiTec™ Drop-In Cool Food Unit, 2-pan size, 4" or 6" deep pans flush w/counter top, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized outer liner, self-contained Eutectic fluid refrigerated system, NSF-7, 1/4 hp. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 7.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard., IW. 3. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 4. Compressor shall be detached from the cold pan and sit directly below cold pan in counter base. 5. Remote On/Off Switch, for in-counter mounting. ITEM 270: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 271: FOOD SHIELD WITH LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single self service, fully adjustable, 12" wide tempered glass top & lower panel (Verify that this will be acceptable with the health department)1" diameter aluminum tubing double supports, NSF, UL Listed 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. T-8 3500k Fluorescent Slimline Light, 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", NSF, UL Listed - Extend wiring down through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Exterior finish to match food shield. 7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #262, Deli/Soup Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 272: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 273: CLEAR GLASS SHIELD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3500-4 Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single full service/vertical partition, fully adjustable, 16"-18"


wide tempered glass, 1" diameter aluminum tubing single supports, NSF 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 7. Install on low wall behind Deli Serving Counter, as shown on plans. Top of posts/glass to be at 60" A.F.F. 8. Food shield posts to be mounted below wall cap with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 274: REFRIGERATED BASE WITH PANS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Refrigerated Base, size and configuration as shown on plan. Similar to standard details FSD1-24, FSD1-26, FSD5-3 and FSD5-4. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Undercounter refrigerator to have compatible coil(s) with thermo expansion valve and a Copelaweld, med temp, air cooled condensing unit complete with air drier, sight glass, pressure and temperature controls, interconnecting tubing, refrigerant and any accessories necessary for a completely functional system for a box temperature of +35 to +40 degrees F., with a 15 degree T.D. 3. Compressor compartment to have hinged louvered access panels, dividers and additional fan for proper ventilation. Provide 1" minimum insulation on top and sides of compressor compartment to prevent the transfer of heat. 4. Provide each section with stainless steel wire bottom shelf and adjustable mid shelf. 5. Hinge doors as indicated on plan. 6. Install in Counter Item #262, Deli/Soup Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 7. Compressor shall be detached from the refrigerated base and sit next to it in the counter base. 8. 404A refrigerant. ITEM 275: CLEAR GLASS SHIELD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3500-4 Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single full service/vertical partition, fully adjustable, 16"-18" wide tempered glass, 1" diameter aluminum tubing single supports, NSF 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std.


4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 7. Install on low wall behind Deli Serving Counter, as shown on plans. Top of posts/glass to be at 60" A.F.F. 8. Food shield posts to be mounted below wall cap with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 276: SANDWICH WARMER Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Turbochef Model: SOTA

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Sota Convection/Microwave Oven, Rapid Cook, electric, 16" wide, ventless, countertop, stores up to 256 recipes, internal catalytic converter, digital display, pull down door with handle, multi-speed convec. blower, includes (1) solid aluminum pan, (1) oven cleaner, (1) oven guard, (1) aluminum paddle, (2) trigger sprayers, (1) standard rack, stainless steel front, top & sides, 4" legs, UL, CE, ANSI. 3. 208v/60/1-ph, 30.0amps, 6.2kw, 6 foot cord (nominal), NEMA 6-30P. 4. Model DOC-1139 Poster, Daily Cleaning, Sota Oven, 8-1/2" x 11". ITEM 277: REFRIGERATED BASE WITH PANS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Refrigerated Base, size and configuration as shown on plan. Similar to standard details FSD1-24, FSD1-26, FSD5-3 and FSD5-4. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 2. Undercounter refrigerator to have compatible coil(s) with thermo expansion valve and a Copelaweld, med temp, air cooled condensing unit complete with air drier, sight glass, pressure and temperature controls, interconnecting tubing, refrigerant and any accessories necessary for a completely functional system for a box temperature of +35 to +40 degrees F., with a 15 degree T.D. 3. Compressor compartment to have hinged louvered access panels, dividers and additional fan for proper ventilation. Provide 1" minimum insulation on top and sides of compressor compartment to prevent the transfer of heat. 4. Provide each section with stainless steel wire bottom shelf and adjustable mid shelf. 5. Hinge doors as indicated on plan.


6. Install in Counter Item #262, Deli/Soup Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 7. Compressor shall be detached from the refrigerated base and sit next to it in the counter base. 8. 404A refrigerant. ITEM 278: MOBILE ENCLOSED RACK-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Food Warming Equip Model: ETC-UA-5

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Enclosed Transport Cabinet, under counter, non-insulated, (5) removable & adjustable universal tray slides 4.5" OC, capacity (5) 18"x26" bun or (10) 12"x20" pans, (1) positive close door, stainless steel interior & exterior, recessed hand grip. 2. Left-hand door hinge in lieu of standard right-hand hinge. 3. Transport latch, non-locking, side mounted. 4. Full perimeter bottom bumper. 5. Provide small casters so that carts will fit below a 34" high counter top. EZ Roll Heavy Duty Poly, 2-rigid, 2-swivel with brakes. ITEM 279: DESSERT BAR SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Doors to have continuous pulls. 4. Provide an open base for under counter pan rack cart. 5. Hinged door at pre-wired electrical. 6. Provide plate shelves in locations shown on plan. 7. Recess controls in apron of counter. Provide protective shields at all knobs, controls, switches, etc. to prevent staff from accidentally bumping into them.


8. Compressor to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressor. 9. Entire counter to be pre-wired to a built-in circuit breaker panel. This shall include all outlets, J-


ITEM 280: MOBILE ENCLOSED RACK-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 281: TOPPINGS DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Rosseto Model: EZ PRO T3/ (Z51377)

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. A Deluxe Stainless Steel Dispenser with advanced portion control. 3 Ergonomically Designed ABS Containers, 3 Paddle Wheels, dispense 1 Tbs. portions and 3 Removable Label Holders. Capacity: Approx. 1 Gallon Each. 2. Spare Parts Included: (3) 6-wing paddle wheel, dispenses 1 oz. portions and (3) Regular Dispenser Nozzle with 2.5 Opening. ITEM 282: SOFT SERVE MACHINE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Taylor Co. Model: C723

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Crown® Series Soft Serve Freezer, counter model, self-contained, twin twist, (2) 14qt. hopper, (2) 2.8qt. freezing cylinder, indicator lights, touch screen controls,, standby, stainless steel finish, (1) 9,500 BTU/hr compressor, R404A, (2) 1.0hp motor, NSF, cUL, CE. 2. Legs. 3. Top Air Discharge. ITEM 283: CONE HOLDER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Tomlinson Industries Model: SF1002


Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Simpli-Flex Ice Cream Cone Dispenser, self-adjusting, tubular pull-type, for medium to large cones, NSF certified. 2. Provide three (3) 24" long stainless steel tubes. ITEM 284: SELF SERVE REFRIGERATED CASE, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: RPI Industries, Inc. Model: VICD3-34-R-CV-SC

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Vienna Cold Display Case, 44-1/4" L, drop-in, self-contained refrig., self service type, programmable refrigeration controller, solid curved tempered glass front, glass side panels, (3) glass shelves w/lights, stainless steel interior, rear see-thru access doors, tilt out front glass, 3/8 hp, ETL, NSF. 2. Self-contained refrigeration, std. 3. 120/230v/60/1-ph, 7.7 amps, NEMA 5-15P, 8' cord. 4. Rear air ventilation kit. 5. Flip up compartment doors on customer side. 6. R404a refrigerant. ITEM 285: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 286: SELF SERVE AMBIENT CASE, COUNTER TOP Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: RPI Industries, Inc. Model: VIDD3-34-R-CV-SC Custom

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Vienna Ambient Display Case, 44-1/4" L, counter top, self service type, solid curved tempered glass front, glass side panels, (3) glass shelves w/lights, stainless steel interior, rear see-thru access doors, tilt out front glass, ETL, NSF. 3. 120v/60/1-ph, 2 amps, NEMA 5-15P, 8' cord. 4. Flip up compartment doors on customer side. 5. Case to match Item #284, except to be counter top and non-refrigerated.


ITEM 287: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 288: CHILLED LETTUCE SUSAN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. All stainless steel insulated round cold pan with 1-1/2 " side insulation and 2" bottom insulation

with galvanized steel outer enclosure pan. Four (4) 9” deep pans to accommodate round shape. Attach multiple strand refrigeration coils on exterior sides and bottom of pan above insulation, connect to refrigeration unit with thermo-expansion valve and a Copelaweld 120V 1Ph 1/3 HP, low-temp, air-cooled condensing unit complete with air drier, sight glass, pressure and temp controls, interconnecting tubing, refrigerant and any accessories necessary for a completely functional system for a plate surface temperature of +20 degrees F., with a 20 degree T.D. Provide an easily accessible ON-OFF switch, just inside the compressor compartment.

2. Compressor compartment to have hinged louvered access panels, dividers and additional fan for proper ventilation. Provide 1" minimum insulation on top and sides of compressor compartment to prevent the transfer of heat.

3. Cooling of top insert pans and maintained temperature shall be in compliance with NSF Standard #7.

4. Install in Item #291, Salad Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 5. Chilled lettuce susan to rotate. Provide knobs in between the pan inserts for easy rotation. 6. 120V 1Ph, IW. 7. Compressor shall be detached from the unit and sit directly below unit in counter base. 8. Provide four (4) extra pan inserts. 9. Integrate round food shield with lights into design. See Item #289. ITEM 289: ROUND ISLAND FOOD SHIELD WITH LIGHTS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: SSXG

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, self service, 42" diameter round tempered glass top, 1-1/2" diameter


aluminum tubing, NSF, UL Listed. 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 3/8" Tempered glass. Glass to be pattern cut to form a 42” diameter flat top shelf. 4. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 5. T-8 3500k Fluorescent Slimline Light, 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", NSF, UL Listed - Extend wiring down through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Exterior finish to match food shield. 6. 120V 1Ph. 7. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 8. Install on Item #291, Salad Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 9. Glass top to be flat with a 1 ½” stainless steel vertical support center post that is integrated into the center of the Chilled Lettuce Susan, Item #288. 10. Unit to include 1” horizontal supports with XGuard top shelf brackets. ITEM 290: WOOD FRUIT DISPLAY TABLE-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Cayuga Model: CC03-103

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Tilt-top Display Table 2' X 3'. 2. Heavy duty locking casters, 2" x 2" steel tubular legs - adjustable, black plastic bumper, pullout drawers on vinyl glides. ITEM 291: SALAD SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Doors to have continuous pulls. 4. Provide an open base for under counter pan rack cart. 5. Counter to be 32" high at Chilled Salad Susan. Remainder of counter to be 34" high. 6. Hinged door at pre-wired electrical. 7. Provide plate shelves in locations shown on plan. 8. Recess controls in apron of counter. Provide protective shields at all knobs, controls, switches, etc. to prevent staff from accidentally bumping into them. 9. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. 10. Send shop drawings to food shield manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs. 11. Entire counter to be pre-wired to a built-in circuit breaker panel. This shall include all outlets, J-

boxes, conduit, wiring, electrical components, and accessories attached to, or built into the


counter. All conduit, with wiring, shall be concealed from view, and installed in a manner which will not interfere with the intended use of the counter. Panel to include a main breaker for single circuit service connection, and individual breakers for items included in the counter. Panel and electrical components and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Verify and coordinate panel service circuit size, load, phasing, and requirements with the Electrical Engineer's documents, and the Electrical Division.

ITEM 292: COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: 8145-EF

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. LiquiTec™ Drop-In Cool Food Unit, 3-pan size, 4" or 6" deep pans flush w/counter top, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized outer liner, self-contained Eutectic fluid refrigerated system, NSF-7, 1/4 hp 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 7.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard 3. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 4. Compressor shall be detached from the cold pans and sit directly below cold pan in counter base. 5. Remote On/Off Switch, for in-counter mounting. ITEM 293: FOOD SHIELD WITH LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: Three (3) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single self service, fully adjustable, 12" wide tempered glass top & lower panel (Verify that this will be acceptable with the health department)1" diameter aluminum tubing double supports, NSF, UL Listed 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. T-8 3500k Fluorescent Slimline Light, 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", NSF, UL Listed - Extend wiring down through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Exterior finish to match food shield. 7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment;


and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #291, Salad Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 294: COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN, WITH TWO TIER STEP Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: 8118-EF

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. LiquiTec™ Drop-In Cool Food Unit, 1-pan size, 4" or 6" deep pans flush w/counter top, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized outer liner, self-contained Eutectic fluid refrigerated system, NSF-7, 1/4 hp. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 7.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard, IW. 3. Contractor to provide a two tier step that will hold twelve (12) 3" diameter bottles of dressing. 4. Compressor shall be detached from the cold pan and sit directly below cold pan in counter base. 5. Remote On/Off Switch, for in-counter mounting. ITEM 295: FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM FOR #299 AND #312 Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Ansul Model: R-102

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Ansulex Liquid Fire Suppressant. Surface appliance nozzles, hood and duct protection nozzles in Exhaust Hoods Item #299 and #312. 2. Manual pull station and micro switches with two sets of normally open and two sets of normally closed contact points. 3. All exposed pipe and fittings to be chrome plated or stainless steel. 4. All components and labor necessary for completely installed system in accordance with manufacturers listings and instructions, U.L. Standard 300, UL Standard 1254, NFPA 17A, NFPA-96, and all applicable local codes, standards, and regulations. 5. Components inside exhaust hood to be installed at hood manufacturer's shop during fabrication. 6. Provide with automatic mechanical gas shut off valves (not electric solenoid valves) for equipment below exhaust hood. Coordinate size and installation with Plumbing Division. 7. Six month and twelve month inspections, servicing, and replacement of components as per N.F.P.A. 96.


8. Electrical Division to provide shunt trip breakers at main power panel, or disconnects, as designated by the Electrical Engineer; interconnected with micro switch at fire system control panel, for all electricity in and under exhaust hood. Shunt trips/disconnects to accomplish shut off of electricity in event of fire system activation. 9. Ansul to provide complete shop drawings, locate and/or verify and coordinate system tank(s), panel, and pull station location and requirements, and verify and coordinate with Mechanical Engineer's documents and Division 15's exhaust and supply air requirements for hood; for proper protection of hood and equipment in and below the hood, controlling of associated components, and interconnection of multiple fire systems as required. 10. Provision and installation of components and system to be by dealer and installer authorized, factory trained, and certified to sell, install, and service Ansul fire suppression system as noted in this specification, at the time of bidding, installation, start-up, and warranty period of this project. 11. As part of this item, provide wall mounted type K Ansul hand held portable fire extinguisher, placard, and mounting bracket as required in the immediate vicinity of each cooking area, per NFPA-96 and NFPA-10. Additional fire extinguishers as required in the kitchen area are to be specified by the Architect and provided by the General Contractor. ITEM 296: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 297: REFRIGERATOR, REACH-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Traulsen Model: AHT232WUT-HHS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Spec-Line Refrigerator, Reach-in, Two-Section, self-contained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior, standard depth, wide half-height doors, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls. 2. 120v/60/1ph, 8.2 amps, w/cord & NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Left door hinged left/right hinged right, standard. 4. Casters, 6" high (set of 4) 5. Provide four additional standard shelves. ITEM 298: HEATED CABINET, MOBILE-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Alto-Shaam Inc. Model: 1200-UP

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Halo Heat® Holding Cabinet, double compartment, on/off simple control with adjustable thermostats, indicator light, holding temperature gauge, (2) sets of chrome plated universal side rails, (4) sets of pan slides, (16) 20" x 12" x 2-1/2" full size pan capacity, heavy duty 20 gauge stainless steel exterior, 5" casters; 2 rigid, 2 swivel with brakes, EcoSmart®, cUL, CE, ENERGY STAR®. 2. 120v/60/1, 16.0amps, 1.9kW, 9' cord, NEMA 5-20P. 3. Solid state electronic control, LED display, with patented SureTemp heat recovery system. 4. Doors hinged on right, standard.


5. Model LK-22567 Door lock with key, per door. 6. Model 5012932 Bumper, full perimeter. 7. Model 5008017 Casters, 3-1/2", stem; 2 rigid, 2 swivel with brakes. 8. Two (2) Model SH-2733 Shelves, chrome-plated wire. ITEM 299: EXHAUST HOOD WITH MUA Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Captive-Aire Model: 5430ND-2-PSP-F










ITEM 300: DOUBLE CONVECTION OVEN, GAS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Blodgett Oven Model: DFG100 DOUBLE

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Convection Oven, gas, double-deck, standard depth, solid state manual control with digital timer, 2-speed fans, (5) racks & (11) positions, interior light, simultaneous operated doors with glass, stainless steel front, sides & top, flue connector, 55,000 BTU each, CSA, NSF, CE, EnergyStar®. 2. (2) 120v/60/1-ph, 6.0 amps, cord & plug, 1/3 hp, standard. 3. 6" casters(set) for double ovens, in lieu of legs. 4. Gas manifold. 5. Verify altitude and type of gas. 6. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 7. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel


ITEM 301: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 302: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 303: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 304: HEATED SHELF, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Hatco


Model: HBGB-3618

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Heated Black Glass Shelf, built-in, 36"L, ceramic glass surface, uniform heat, 100° - 200°F thermostatic control with lighted on/off rocker switch, choice of frame finish, 630w. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 630W, NEMA 5-15P. 3. Stainless steel trim ring. 4. Flush Mounted Control Box with lighted power switch. 5. Install remote control panel on server side of counter. ITEM 305: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 306: FOOD SHIELD WITH WARMERS, LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930



7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #324, Noodles and Pasta Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Provide extended post in location shown on plans, for an electronic menu sign to be attached to the post. Post shall be 1-1/2" diameter to accommodate the wiring for the electronic menu sign. Kitchen contractor to coordinate installation with signage manufacturer. 12. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 307: RICE COOKER/WARMER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Town Equipment


Model: 57155

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. RiceMaster® Rice Cooker/Steamer, electronic, 55 cup capacity, one touch, auto cook/hold, cooks in 46 minutes, 208v/60/1-ph, 15 Amp, ETL, NSF. 2. Provide three (3) additional rice pot inserts. ITEM 308: CLEAR GLASS SHIELD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3500-4 Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single full service/vertical partition, fully adjustable, 18" wide tempered glass, 1" diameter aluminum tubing single supports, NSF 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 7. Install on Item #324, Noodles and Pasta Serving Counter, as shown on plans. 8. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 309: 12 BURNER STEP-UP RANGE ASSEMBLY WITH REFRIGERATED DRAWERS, GAS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Montague Company Model: (2) M36-5S/RB-72-SC

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Two (2) Legend 36" Heavy Duty Ranges, gas, (6) 12" 30,000 BTU Step-Up open burners, stainless steel front & 4" flue riser, 150,000 BTU each. 2. Legend Heavy Duty Extreme Cuisine Refrigerated Equipment Base/Stand, 72" self-contained, two sections of drawers on 14 gauge stainless steel track system, (2) 22-3/8" & (2) 27-1/4" wide drawers, (7) pan capacity (pans NOT included), welded stainless steel body,


frame, front, sides & top, 120v/60/1-ph, 8.9 amps, 1/4 hp, cord & plug. 3. Casters w/5" wheel 6" OA (set of 6), in lieu of legs. 4. Cap & stainless steel manifold cover, left and right. 5. Sides, stainless steel for range. 6. Verify altitude and type of gas. 7. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 8. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel


ITEM 310: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 311: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 312: ISLAND ROUND EXHAUST HOOD WITHOUT MUA Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Captive-Aire Model: 9630NRIH

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Assembly to consist of one round (1) section to be 8'-0" diameter. 2. 18 Gauge type 304 stainless steel. 3. External welded construction in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 96. All welds to be









ITEM 313: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 314: CLEAR GLASS SHIELD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3500-4 Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single full service/vertical partition, fully adjustable, 16"-18" wide tempered glass, 1" diameter aluminum tubing single supports, NSF 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 7. Install on Item #324, Noodles and Pasta Serving Counter, as shown on plans. Top of posts/glass to be at 60" A.F.F. 8. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 315: HINGED GLASS SHIELD Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: Custom Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Hinged, round, glass panels that are connected from the counter top to the soffit that encases the exhaust hood. 2. Refer to Interior Designer’s details (QF5 Series drawings) and specifications for complete

instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation.


ITEM 316: DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELL UNIT, ELECTRIC Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: N8731-D

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Drop-In Hot Food Well Unit, Electric, individual pans, wet/dry type with drain & manifold, 2-pan size for 12" x 20" pans, remote control panel w/individual thermostat controls, stainless steel top & wells, galvanized outer liner 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 16.6 amps, no cord & plug, standard. 3. Automatic water fill kit 4. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 5. Install remote control panel on server side of counter. ITEM 317: REMOTE COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: 8132-EF

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. LiquiTec™ Drop-In Cool Food Unit, 2-pan size, 4" or 6" deep pans flush w/counter top, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized outer liner. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 2.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard 3. Remote refrigeration-Refer to Item #320, Compressor. 4. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 5. Remote On/Off Switch, for in-counter mounting. ITEM 318: FOOD SHIELD WITH LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single self service, fully adjustable, 12" wide tempered glass top & lower panel (Verify that this will be acceptable with the health department)1" diameter aluminum tubing double supports, NSF, UL Listed 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. T-8 3500k Fluorescent Slimline Light, 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", NSF, UL Listed - Extend wiring down through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Exterior finish to match food shield.


7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #324, Noodles and Pasta Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 319: REMOTE COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Delfield Model: 8145-EF

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. LiquiTec™ Drop-In Cool Food Unit, 3-pan size, 4" or 6" deep pans flush w/counter top, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized outer liner. 2. 120v/60/1-ph, 2 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard. 3. Remote refrigeration-Refer to Item #320, Compressor. 4. Additional adapter bars. Verify quantity with Owner. 5. Remote On/Off Switch, for in-counter mounting. ITEM 320: COMPRESSOR FOR #317 AND #319 Quantity: One (1) Assembly Manufacturer: Copeland Model: M4FL-0040-IAA Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. One (1) pre-assembled, remote, air-cooled, 120V 1Ph R404A cold pan refrigeration system.

System to consist of condensing unit (high side assembly) and low profile evaporator coil (low side assembly), evaporator mounting kit, thermostatic expansion valve, pump-down cycle kit, solenoid valve, temperature control, sight glass, drier, vibration eliminator, pressure control, crankcase heater, extreme low ambient controls and any accessories necessary for a completely installed and functional system for three refrigerated cold pans.




4. Compressor to connect to Items #317 and #319 in the Noodles and Pasta Serving Counter. ITEM 321: FOOD SHIELD WITH LIGHTS AND END PANELS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: BSI, LLC Model: XG3930

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. XGuard Food Shield, single self service, fully adjustable, 12" wide tempered glass top & lower panel (Verify that this will be acceptable with the health department)1" diameter aluminum tubing double supports, NSF, UL Listed 2. Post Finish: Brushed aluminum. 3. 1" radius corner, std. 4. 3/8" Tempered glass. 5. Verify and coordinate with local Health Department requirements. 6. T-8 3500k Fluorescent Slimline Light, 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", NSF, UL Listed - Extend wiring down through leg support. Infinite control with remote enclosure and pilot light. Exterior finish to match food shield. 7. 120V 1Ph. 8. Provide an end panel on each side-3/8” thick tempered glass with polished edges. 9. Coordinate support legs placement and mounting method, with the counter top and equipment; and the counter fabricator. Provide shop drawings to the counter fabricator for their coordination. 10. Install on Item #324, Noodles and Pasta Counter, as shown on plans. 11. Provide extended post in location shown on plans, for an electronic menu sign to be attached to the post. Post shall be 1-1/2" diameter to accommodate the wiring for the electronic menu sign. Kitchen contractor to coordinate installation with signage manufacturer. 12. Food shield posts to be mounted below counter top with heavy duty flanges. Install posts so that they are straight and do not wobble. ITEM 322: HAND SINK Quantity: One (1)


Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model: 7-PS-91

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Hand Sink, pedestal mounted base, 14" wide x 10" front-to-back x 5" deep, 20 gauge stainless steel construction, electronic faucet, basket drain, wall bracket. 2. Model K-08 Low-flow aerator 0.5gpm. 3. Model 7-PS-10 P-trap, heavy duty, 1-1/2", 17 gauge. 4. Model 7-PS-17 Welded Side Splash, 7-3/4" tall, both sides, for hand sinks with 10"x14" bowls & splash mounted faucets. 5. 120V 1ph, HW, CW, DW. ITEM 323: SOAP/TOWEL DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: One (1) ITEM 324: NOODLES AND PASTA SERVING COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks on staff side. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Doors to have continuous pulls. 4. Counter top height to be 20” at rice warmers, 15" high at plates/pans, and 42" in location shown on the plan. Remainder of counter top to be at 34". 5. Hinged door at pre-wired electrical. 6. Recess controls in apron of counter. Provide protective shields at all knobs, controls, switches, etc. to prevent staff from accidentally bumping into them. 7. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressors. Remote compressors to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressors. 8. Send shop drawings to food shield manufacturer for coordination of counter top cut-outs. 9. Entire counter to be pre-wired to a built-in circuit breaker panel. This shall include all outlets, J-




ITEM 326: WORK COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. 2. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 4. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 5. Doors to have continuous pulls. 6. Provide keyed locks for doors. 7. Backsplash at wall, similar to FSD1-5A. 8. Provide a flat pull-out drawer assembly for remote compressor. Remote compressor to be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide adequate ventilation for compressor. ITEM #327: REFRIGERATED DRAWERS Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications. 1. Similar to standard details FSD1-20, FSD1-21 and FSD1-24. These standard details are to be

utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions.

2. Undercounter refrigerated drawers to have compatible coil(s) with thermo-expansion valve and a Copelaweld 120V 1Ph, med-temp, air-cooled condensing unit complete with air drier, sight glass, pressure and temp controls, interconnecting tubing, refrigerant and any accessories necessary for a completely functional system for a box temperature of +35 to +40 degrees F., with a 15 degree T.D.


4. Provide drawers with 4” deep, full size stainless steel pans. 5. Install in Counter Item #326, Work Counter, as shown on plans. 6. Compressor shall be detached from the refrigerated drawer base and sit next to it in the counter base. 7. 404A refrigerant. ITEM 328: WORK COUNTER WITH SINK Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.


1. 2'-10" High, See Plans for Width, Length and Configuration. 2. Similar to standard details FSD5-1, FSD1-7 and FSD1-10. These standard details are to be utilized as basic minimum guidelines only. Refer to these written specifications and any fabrication details included in the contract drawings for precise and complete fabrication instructions. 3. Provide with Sink, similar to detail FSD5-2. 4. Provide single 10" deep integral sink similar to detail FSD5-2. Size and location as shown on plan. Provide waste lever bracket similar to detail FSD1-13. 5. Provide One (1) Fisher 3113 or T&S B-0201 deck mount faucet (12" spout) and one (1) rotary waste assembly. 6. Straight Turn-Down edge profile similar to detail FSD1-1A. 7. Backsplash at wall and adjacent equipment, similar to FSD1-5A. 8. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 9. Doors to have continuous pulls. 10. Provide keyed locks for doors. 11. HW, CW, IW. ITEM 329: WOK RANGE Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Jade Range Model: JCR-2

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Titan Chinese Range, heavy duty, gas, (2) hole, full welded heavy gauge stainless steel construction, knee valve, top cooling water flow with control valve, s/s back splash with s/s tubular rack, one (1) 16" and one (1) 14" wok bowl and lid per hole, (1) 12" x 20" s/s spice tray, s/s drip trays, standard rear trough with perforated basket. 2. Two 14" diameter holes. 3. 2 ea Jet burners, 110,000 BTU each 4. Gas inlet left 5. Drain right 6. 2 ea Swing faucet / Auto-On, one per every hole, standard 7. 2 ea Stainless steel drip tray 8. 2 ea Dry-Flow Wok Chamber - dual chamber design, will significantly reduce heat transfer to wok range top and eliminating the need for continuous water flow. Outer chamber diameter is 2" larger than wok hole size selection. 9. 1 ea Water control knee-valve - used in conjunction with Dry-Flow wok design; top deck water flow/back splash waterfall only functions when water valve is depressed with knee; designed to significantly reduce water consumption by eliminating the option of "ALWAYS-ON" top cooling water flow or faucets; one per waterfall/top water flow or one per faucet 10. 2 ea Rear water fall w/front trough & front catch basket, per hole 11. 2 ea Wok ring reducer - to reduce from 14" to 12" for use with 12" diameter wok pans. 12. Verify altitude and type of gas. 13. Gas pressure regulating valve with built-in vent limiting device. 14. One (1) T&S commercial use A.G.A. and local code approved poly coated flexible stainless steel

gas hose assembly 48" long, with FreeSpin fittings and SwiveLinks on both ends, quick disconnect assembly on one end, and with installation/restraining kit. Install the restraining device and provide instructions and coordination for the Plumbing Division's use in installing the hose


components. 15. Refer to sheet QF10.01 for further details. ITEM 330: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 331: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 332: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 333: 8' BUTCHER BLOCK TABLE-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: John Boos Model: CHY-CUCR05-AL Custom

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. American Heritage Rustica Butcher Block, 24" W x 96" L x 34-1/2" H, 4" thick American Cherry end grain top with Boos Block Cream Finish with Beeswax, (2) dovetailed drawers. 2. 4" Thick Hard Maple Top (End Grain), 4" Thick Hard Maple Butcher Block Top (End Grain), Standard Boos Block Cream Finish w/Beeswax 3. Stain finish to be determined by Interior Designer. ITEM 334: MOBILE PLATE DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: APW Wyott Model: ML2-10

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Lowerator® Dispenser, Dish, cabinet style, enclosed base, mobile design, two self-elevating dish dispensing tubes, maximum dish size 10 1/8" diameter, stainless steel construction. 2. [TEXT DELETED] 3. Provide full perimeter bumper guard. ITEM 335: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 336: BEVERAGE COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. 3. Counter top height to be 30”. 4. Provide a removable undershelf below the water dispenser (only at floor sink) to allow access to

the floor sink. ITEM 337: TUMBLER DISPENSER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER (SPECIFICATION FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Quantity: Two (2) Manufacturer: Piper Products/Servolift Eastern Model: AC-ST-2020-14OZ

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Tumbler Serve™ Dispenser, cabinet style, enclosed base, mobile design, capacity 425 plastic tumblers up to 14 oz., stainless steel construction, 4" swivel casters. 2. Model -PB Full Perimeter Non Marking Bumper. 3. Model -WB Wheel brakes (set of 2) 4. Exterior of dispensers shall have a stainless steel finish. 5. Polyurethane 4" casters, set of 4, with ball bearing seals. ITEM 338: WATER DISPENSER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Innowave Model: Chiller 3, Counter Top

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. The innowave Chiller 3™ Counter Top is equipped with In-Tank Sanitization. This feature utilizes ultra violet light as an effective method to prevent the potential for biofilm (slime) buildup in the storage tank after chlorine has been reduced through carbon filtration. 2. NSF/ANSI 61 certified by WQA (Water Quality Association) 3. 120V 1Ph, CW. 4. Provide water filter brackets and water filter.


ITEM 339: TEA DISPENSER-EXISTING (BIB) Quantity: One (1) ITEM 340: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 341: JUICE DISPENSER-EXISTING (BIB) Quantity: One (1) ITEM 342: SODA/ICE DISPENSER-EXISTING (BIB) Quantity: One (1) ITEM 343: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 344: COFFEE DISPENSER-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 345: SPARE NUMBER ITEM 346: GLUTEN FREE COUNTER Quantity: One (1) Manufacturer: Brass Smith Model: Contoura - Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes


for complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. 2. Cabinet base with hinged doors and locks. Provide a mid-shelf where possible. ITEM 347: COUNTER TOP REFRIGERATOR-EXISTING Quantity: One (1) ITEM 348: COUNTER TOP WARMER-PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER Quantity: One (1) ITEM 349: SPARE NUMBER


ITEM 350: SILVERWARE STATION Quantity: Four (4) Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Stainless Steel Base with Decor Finishes Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following: 1. Stations to be built around the building columns in locations shown on plan. 2. Refer to Interior Designer’s details (QF5 Series drawings and sheet ID-507) and specifications for

complete instructions on fabrication, dimensions, materials, and installation. ITEM 351-360: SPARE NUMBER End of 11 40 00 specifications

Colorado State University 23 05 13 - 1 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Durrell Center Revitalization 28 June 2012 Project Number 11-038 Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Fort Collins, Colorado

SECTION 23 05 13

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.02 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 5500 feet above sea level.


B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.03 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

L. Provide phase protection on motors above 5 hp.

2.04 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.


3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.05 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 23 05 13

Colorado State University 26 05 19 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Durrell Center Revitalization 28 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. [Deleted text] 2. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and

data circuits.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. See Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures, for substitution procedures allowed only during the bid process.

C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Field quality-control test reports.


1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. [Deleted Text]:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company.

C. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

D. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN XHHW.

E. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Type SO with ground wire.

2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES



B. [Deleted text]

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.03 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.04 SLEEVE SEALS

A. [Deleted text]

B. [Deleted text]

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

D. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

J. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

K. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

M. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

N. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.


3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

3.05 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.


E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.06 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.07 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


Colorado State University 26 05 29 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Durrell Center Revitalization 28 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


1.05 SUBMITTALS



C. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

D. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.

E. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. [Deleted text]:


a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4. 6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface.


2. [Deleted text]

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

4. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.

5. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Attachments to concrete structure: Where attachment to concrete structure is required, utilize mechanical (expansion, friction, or thread cutting) or chemical anchors or power actuated fasteners properly sized for the item attached. Maintain manufacture’s required minimum edge distances and spacing. Where different types of attachments are utilized in the same vicinity, minimum spacing shall be based on the largest required minimum spacing of each attachment


type. All anchors shall have a minimum factor of safety of four for both tension and shear loads, except power-actuated fasteners shall have a minimum factor of safety of six for both tension and shear loads. When required by code, utilize approved anchors (U.L., ICC-ES, etc) as required by code.

H. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. [Deleted text]:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. [Deleted text]:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.


B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.


6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.04 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.05 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.


C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


Colorado State University 26 05 33 - 1 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Durrell Center Revitalization 28 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B. [Deleted text].

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.04 SUBMITTALS



C. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.


D. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:

a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. c. Grounding details. d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. e. Joint details.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: For wireways and surface raceways with factory-applied texture and color finishes.

F. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required for wireways and surface raceways, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

G. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

H. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will retain its enclosure characteristics, including its interior accessibility, after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

I. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

J. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


B. [Deleted text]:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 7. Maverick Tube Corporation. 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Company.

C. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

D. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

E. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

G. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

H. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

J. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, compression type. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

K. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.


2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


B. [Deleted text]:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

C. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

D. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

E. LFNC: UL 1660.

F. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

G. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.03 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS


B. [Deleted text]:

1. Arnco Corporation. 2. Endot Industries Inc. 3. IPEX Inc. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 5. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for riser installation.

2.04 METAL WIREWAYS


B. [Deleted text]:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.


2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.05 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS


B. [Deleted Text]:

1. Hoffman. 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

D. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

E. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.06 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.


2. [Deleted text]:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.


B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.


2. [Deleted text]:

a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division. b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division. c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. e. Panduit Corp. f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.07 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


B. [Deleted text]:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

F. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, semi-adjustable, rectangular.

G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.


J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.08 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color of Frame and Cover: Green. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." or "TELEPHONE." 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis.

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester-resin enclosure joined to polymer-concrete top ring or frame.





a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Christy Concrete Products. d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast.

D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of reinforced concrete.




a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.

2.09 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.10 SLEEVE SEALS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

D. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R . 6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.


c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes

raceways in the following locations:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: EMT. 8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 9. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or

Communications Cable: EMT. 10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.


D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.


1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125

deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. e.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

Q. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

R. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.


a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.05 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.


E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.06 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.07 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


3.08 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.


Colorado State University 26 05 36 - 1 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Durrell Center Revitalization 28 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 26 05 36

CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes aluminum cable trays and accessories.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



C. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.

D. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.

2. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, who is responsible for their preparation.

a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. b. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to

supported cable trays.

E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Show the following:

1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. 2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. 3. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.

F. Field quality-control reports.


G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cable trays to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single manufacturer.



1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Aluminum cable tray may be stored outside without cover, but shall be loosely stacked, elevated off the ground, and ventilated to prevent staining during storage.

B. Store indoors to prevent water or other foreign materials from staining or adhering to cable tray. Unpack and dry wet materials before storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS


B. [Deleted text]:

1. Chalfant Manufacturing Company. 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 3. Cope, T. J., Inc.; a subsidiary of Allied Tube & Conduit. 4. GS Metals Corp.; GLOBETRAY Products. 5. MONO-SYSTEMS, Inc. 6. MPHusky. 7. PW Industries.

2.02 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, complying with NEMA VE 1.

1. Factory-standard primer, ready for field painting; with cadmium-plated hardware according to ASTM B 766.

2. Mill galvanized before fabrication, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating; with hardware galvanized according to ASTM B 633.


3. Electrogalvanized before fabrication, complying with ASTM B 633; with hardware galvanized according to ASTM B 633.

4. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Class B2; with chromium-zinc, ASTM F 1136, hardware.

5. PVC coating applied in a fluidized bed or by electrostatic spray; with chromium-zinc, ASTM F 1136 hardware.

6. Epoxy-resin paint over paint manufacturer's recommended primer and corrosion-inhibiting treatment; with cadmium-plated hardware according to ASTM B 766.

7.

B. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Aluminum, complying with NEMA VE 1, Aluminum Association's Alloy 6063-T6 for rails, rungs, and cable trays, and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 for fabricated parts; with chromium-zinc, ASTM F 1136, splice-plate fasteners, bolts, and screws

C. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Stainless steel, Type 316, complying with NEMA VE 1.

D. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Fiberglass, complying with NEMA FG 1 and UL 568. Splice-plate fasteners, bolts, and screws shall be fiberglass-encapsulated stainless steel. Design fasteners so that no metal is visible when fully assembled and tightened. Fastener encapsulation shall not be damaged when torqued to manufacturer's recommended value.

E. Sizes and Configurations: Refer to the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.

1. Center-hanger supports may be used only when specifically indicated.

2.03 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray.

B. Covers: Solid type of same materials and finishes as cable tray.

C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.

D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

2.04 WARNING SIGNS

A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- high, black letters on yellow background with legend "WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR PERSONNEL."

B. Materials and fastening are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform design and production tests according to NEMA FG 1.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with recommendations in NEMA VE 2. Install as a complete system, including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.

B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

C. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints.

1. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements 2. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules. 3. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances

furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application.

4. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. 5. Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric

loading condition, with a safety factor of 3. 6. Locate and install supports according to NEMA FG 1.

D. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray and to equipment. Support cable tray independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable tray on equipment enclosure.

E. Install expansion connectors where cable tray crosses building expansion joint and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA FG 1. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.

F. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.

G. Make cable tray connections using standard fittings.

H. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

I. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.

J. Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.

K. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.

L. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays.

3.02 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when cable tray installation has been completed and inspected.


B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties as recommended by NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.

C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 18 inches. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.

D. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable tray.

E. Install covers after installation of cable is completed.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable tray, in addition to those required by NFPA 70.


A. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:

1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable tray, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.

2. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable tray do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communication or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers.

3. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that could damage cables.

4. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation.

5. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas.

6. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware.

7. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray.

B. Report results in writing.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cable trays.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer.


2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

3. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to protect exposed cables from falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials until the risk of damage is over.


Colorado State University 26 05 53 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Durrell Center Revitalization 28 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



C. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

D. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

E. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.


D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high letters on

20-inch centers.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.


G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.

H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.02 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high letters on

20-inch centers.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.


D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.



E. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.04 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.



2.05 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.


2.06 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

C. Tag:

1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Thickness: 4 mils. 3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft.. 4. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf, and 2500 psi.

2.07 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."


2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.08 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.09 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 2 inch.

2.10 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.


B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.


G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. [Deleted text].

B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Snap-around labels. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. [Deleted text].


d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. [Deleted text].

G. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

J. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

K. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

L. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

M. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

N. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.


O. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label Stenciled legend 4 inches high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. [Deleted text]. g. [Deleted text]. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. [Deleted text]. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Battery-inverter units. s. Battery racks. t. [Deleted text]. u. Monitoring and control equipment. v. UPS equipment.


Colorado State University 26 05 73 - 1 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY Durrell Center Revitalization 29 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 26 05 73

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

1. Coordination of series-rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



C. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

D. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

E. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

F. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. 3. Coordination-Study Report.

G. Provide initial study with gear shop drawings. Provide final study when exact distances and feeder lengths are known.



A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. [Deleted text]

B. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. only.

C. [Deleted text]

2.02 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence. d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.02 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance. 3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation, and length. f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.


i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.03 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:

1. Switchgear and switchboard bus. 2. Medium-voltage controller. 3. Motor-control center. 4. Distribution panelboard. 5. Branch circuit panelboard.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.

1. Transformers:

a. ANSI C57.12.10. b. ANSI C57.12.22. c. ANSI C57.12.40. d. IEEE C57.12.00. e. IEEE C57.96.

2. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010. 3. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1. 4. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:

1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

2. Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on medium- [and high-]voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of overcurrent relays.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.


2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.04 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-

circuit currents. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 241 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is

specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.

E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup

values. c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous

settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.


2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

G. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.05 ARC-FLASH STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available arc-flash intensity at each of the following:

1. Switchgear and switchboard bus added or modified by this project. 2. [Deleted text] 3. [Deleted text] 4. Distribution panelboards added or modified by this project. 5. Branch circuit panelboard added or modified by this project.

B. Study Report: Provide Arc-Flash study report including each calculated item.

C. Equipment Evaluation Report: Provide Arc-Flash study report including each calculated item.

D. Equipment Labeling: Furnish and install Arc-Flash labels at all new electrical panels and all panels modified by this project.


Colorado State University 26 24 16 - 1 PANELBOARDS Durrell Center Revitalization 20 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 1 - Bid Project Number 11-038

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers. 4. Electronic-grade panelboards.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.05 SUBMITTALS



C. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.


D. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




G. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

H. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.


1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and

type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 3R,. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 5.


2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components.

7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated

from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-

capacity neutral bus.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type


of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.

I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.02 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. [Deleted text]

B. [Deleted text] Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 1. [Deleted text]

C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

D. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

E. Mains: Circuit breaker.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

H. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

I. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. [Deleted text]


C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.


F. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

G. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

H. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.04 LOAD CENTERS

A. [Deleted text]


C. Load Centers: Comply with UL 67.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

F. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses.

2.05 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. [Deleted text]


C. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I

2t response.


4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Remote-mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Shunt Trip: 120 -V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.

f. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

h. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

D. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: One normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with

switch handle operation.

2.06 [Deleted text]

2.07 [Deleted text]

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

I. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

J. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

K. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.


Colorado State University 26 27 26 - 1 WIRING DEVICES Durrell Center Revitalization 28 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. [Deleted text]. 4. Wall-box motion sensors. 5. Isolated-ground receptacles. 6. [Deleted text]. 7. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 8. Solid-state fan speed controls. 9. [Deleted text]. 10. Communications outlets. 11. Pendant cord-connector devices. 12. Cord and plug sets. 13. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet

assemblies.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.


1.04 SUBMITTALS



C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

D. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

E. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.



1.06 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.


A. [Deleted text].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).


2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.02 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

B. [Deleted text].

C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.



a. Hubbell; CR 5253IG. b. Leviton; 5362-IG. c. Pass & Seymour; IG6300.

3. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

D. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.



a. Cooper; TR8300. b. Hubbell; HBL8300SG. c. Leviton; 8300-SGG. d. Pass & Seymour; 63H.

3. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric Locations" Section.


2.03 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:



a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. c.

C. [Deleted text].

2.04 TVSS RECEPTACLES

A. [Deleted text].

2.05 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES

A. [Deleted text]

2.06 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.



a. Cooper; L520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:



a. Hubbell; IG2310. b. Leviton; 2310-IG.

3. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw


terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.07 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip.

2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.08 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.09 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:



a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:



a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.


c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

3. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:



a. Cooper; 2221L. b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. c. Leviton; 1221-2L. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

3. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.



a. Cooper; 1995. b. Hubbell; HBL1557. c. Leviton; 1257. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.



a. Cooper; 1995L. b. Hubbell; HBL1557L. c. Leviton; 1257L. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.10 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.


1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated when "OFF."

D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.11 FAN SPEED CONTROLS

A. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. Comply with UL 1917.

1. Continuously adjustable slider,. 2. Three-speed adjustable slider, 1.5 A.

2.12 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. [Deleted text].

2.13 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

A. Telephone Outlet:


2. [Deleted text]:

a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649.

3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

B. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:


2. [Deleted text]:

a. Cooper; 3562. b. Leviton; 40595.

3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.

2.14 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.


2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant , die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.15 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. [Deleted text].

2.16 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES


B. [Deleted text]:

1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories. 3. Square D/ Schneider Electric. 4. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 5. Wiremold Company (The).

C. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly.

1. Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with four simplex receptacles and space for four RJ-45 jacks.

2. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness. 3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. 4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating

of floor. 5. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors

and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 5e voice and data communication cables.

2.17 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES


B. [Deleted text]:

1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 2. Wiremold Company (The).

C. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.


D. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.

E. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

2.18 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: Blue. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.


2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the

manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. [Deleted text].


2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. [Deleted text].


Colorado State University 26 28 16 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Durrell Center Revitalization 28 June 2012 Fort Collins, Colorado Issue 2 – Addendum 1 Project Number 11-038

SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. [Deleted text]. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Molded-case switches. 7. Enclosures.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.05 SUBMITTALS




C. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit electronically.

D. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




G. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

H. Manufacturer's field service report.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit electronically.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's

written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. [Deleted text]

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. [Deleted text].

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. [Deleted text].

F. [Deleted text].

G. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 8. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 9. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 24-V ac.

2.02 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. [Deleted text]




C. [Deleted text].

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. [Deleted text].

F. [Deleted text].

G. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 24-V ac.

2.03 RECEPTACLE SWITCHES

A. [Deleted text].

2.04 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES

A. [Deleted text]


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 3. Littelfuse, Inc.

C. General Requirements: Comply with UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.


D. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip, connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.

F. Accessories:

1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function. 2. Oiltight red ON pilot light. 3. Isolated neutral lug; 200 percent rating. 4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and

closed. 5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped. 6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 24-V dc coil voltage. 7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.

2.05 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. [Deleted text]


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. .

C. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

D. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

E. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

F. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I

2t response.


G. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

H. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

I. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

J. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

K. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 6. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay. 7. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 8. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 9. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 10. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault

protection function. 11. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 12. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered;.

2.06 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES

A. [Deleted text]



C. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.


D. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with

mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay. 6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic switch

contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts. 7. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when switch has tripped. 8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be removable

only when switch is in off position. 9. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking

ground-fault protection function. 10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 11. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered;.

2.07 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 3R,. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 5. [Deleted text]. 6. [Deleted text].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.


B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.


b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study".
